Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
*
C copyright 2008 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
1) 4-door
2) 5-door and OUTBACK
3) WRX STI
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5
& Child safety The SRS airbag deploys with . Never leave unattended children
considerable speed and force in the vehicle. They could acci-
WARNING and can injure or even kill chil- dentally injure themselves or
dren, especially if they are 12 others through inadvertent op-
. Never hold a child on your lap or years of age and under and are eration of the vehicle. Also, on
in your arms while the vehicle is not restrained or improperly re- hot or sunny days, temperature
moving. The passenger cannot strained. Because children are in a closed vehicle could quickly
protect the child from injury in a lighter and weaker than adults, become high enough to cause
collision, because the child will their risk of being injured from severe or possibly fatal injuries
be caught between the passen- deployment is greater. to them.
ger and objects inside the vehi- . NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD . Help prevent young children from
cle. FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE locking themselves in the trunk.
. While riding in the vehicle, in- FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS On hot or sunny days, the tem-
fants and small children should SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO perature in the trunk could
always be placed in the REAR THE CHILD BY PLACING THE quickly become high enough to
seat in an infant or child restraint CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO cause death or serious heat-
system which is appropriate for THE SRS AIRBAG. related injuries including brain
the child’s age, height and . Always turn the child safety locks damage to anyone locked inside,
weight. If a child is too big for a to the “LOCK” position when particularly for small children.
child restraint system, the child children sit in the rear seat. . When leaving the vehicle, either
should sit in the REAR seat and Serious injury could result if a close all windows and lock all
be restrained using the seatbelts. child accidentally opens the door doors. Also make certain that the
According to accident statistics, and falls out. Refer to “Child trunk is closed.
children are safer when properly safety locks” F2-19.
restrained in the rear seating For instructions and precautions, carefully
positions than in the front seat- . Always lock the passenger’s win-
dows using the lock switch when read the following sections.
ing positions. Never allow a child . For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
to stand up or kneel on the seat. children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure belts” F1-10.
. Put children aged 12 and under in could result in injury to a child . For the child restraint system, refer to
the REAR seat properly re- operating the power window. Re- “Child restraint systems” F1-23.
strained at all times in a child fer to “Windows” F2-19. . For the SRS airbag system, refer to
restraint device or in a seatbelt.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6
“*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint ways works properly. & Drinking and driving
System airbag)” F1-36. . If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the WARNING
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon vehicle, have the problem
monoxide) checked and corrected as soon Drinking and then driving is very
as possible. If you must drive dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
WARNING under these conditions, drive stream delays your reaction time
only with all windows fully open. and impairs your perception, judg-
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas. ment and attentiveness. If you drive
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate after drinking – even if you drink just
Engine exhaust gas contains
closed while driving to prevent a little – it will increase the risk of
carbon monoxide, a colorless
exhaust gas from entering the being involved in a serious or fatal
and odorless gas which is dan-
vehicle. accident, injuring or killing yourself,
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en- your passengers and others. In
gine exhaust system to prevent addition, if you are injured in the
engine exhaust gas from enter- accident, alcohol may increase the
ing the vehicle. severity of that injury.
. Never run the engine in a closed Please don’t drink and drive.
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive Drunken driving is one of the most
the vehicle in or out of it. frequent causes of accidents. Since alco-
hol affects all people differently, you may
. Avoid remaining in a parked have consumed too much alcohol to drive
vehicle for a lengthy time while safely even if the level of alcohol in your
the engine is running. If that is blood is below the legal limit. The safest
unavoidable, then use the venti- thing you can do is never drink and drive.
lation fan to force fresh air into However if you have no choice but to
the vehicle. drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-
. Always keep the front ventilator tely before getting behind the wheel.
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7
& Drugs and driving & Driving when tired or sleepy performance problems resulting
from modification may not be cov-
WARNING WARNING ered under warranties.
There are some drugs (over the When you are tired or sleepy, your
counter and prescription) that can reaction time will be delayed and & Car phone/cell phone and
delay your reaction time and impair your perception, judgment and at- driving
your perception, judgment and at- tentiveness will be impaired. If you
tentiveness. If you drive after taking drive when tired or sleepy, your, CAUTION
them, it may increase your, your your passengers’ and other per-
passengers’ and other persons’ risk sons’ chances of being involved in Do not use a car phone/cell phone
of being involved in a serious or a serious accident may increase. while driving; it may distract your
fatal accident. attention from driving and can lead
Please do not continue to drive but to an accident. If you use a car
If you are taking any drugs, check with instead find a safe place to rest if you phone/cell phone, pull off the road
your doctor or pharmacist or read the are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you and park in a safe place before
literature that accompanies the medication should make periodic rest stops to refresh using your phone. In some States/
to determine if the drug you are taking can yourself before continuing on your journey. Provinces, only hands-free phones
impair your driving ability. Do not drive When possible, you should share the may legally be used while driving.
after taking any medications that can driving with others.
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If & Modification of your vehicle & Driving vehicles equipped
you have a medical condition that requires with navigation system
you to take drugs, please consult with CAUTION
your doctor.
WARNING
Your vehicle should not be modified
Never drive if you are under the influence other than with genuine SUBARU
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your Do not allow the monitor to distract
parts and accessories. Other types your attention from driving. Also, do
own health and well-being, we urge you of modifications could affect its
not to take illegal drugs in the first place not operate the controls of the
performance, safety or durability, navigation system while driving.
and to seek treatment if you are addicted and may even violate governmental
to those drugs. The loss of attention to driving
regulations. In addition, damage or could lead to an accident. If you
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8
wish to operate the controls of the & Tire pressures & California proposition 65
navigation system, first take the Check and, if necessary, adjust the warning
vehicle off the road and stop it in a pressure of each tire (including the spare)
safe place. at least once a month and before any long WARNING
journey.
Engine exhaust, some of its consti-
& Driving with pets Check the tire pressure when the tires are tuents, and certain vehicle compo-
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the nents contain or emit chemicals
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
tire pressures to the values shown on the known to the State of California to
driving and distract your attention from
tire placard. cause cancer and birth defects or
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown For detailed information, refer to “Tires other reproductive harm. In addi-
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or and wheels” F11-33. tion, certain fluids in vehicles and
your passengers. Besides, the pets can certain components of product wear
be hurt under these situations. It is also for WARNING contain or emit chemicals known to
their own safety that pets should be the State of California to cause
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re- Driving at high speeds with exces- cancer and birth defects or other
strain a pet with a special traveling sively low tire pressures can cause reproductive harm.
harness which can be secured to the rear the tires to deform severely and to
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
which can be secured to the rear seat by crease in temperature could cause
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s tread separation, and destruction of
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers the tires. The resulting loss of
in the front passenger’s seat. For further vehicle control could lead to an
information, consult your veterinarian, accident.
local animal protection society or pet
shop.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Table of contents
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10
1) Engine hood (page 11-5)
Illustrated index 2) Headlight switch (page 3-35)
3) Replacing bulbs (page 11-48)
& Exterior 4) Wiper switch (page 3-39)
5) Moonroof (page 2-25)
6) Door locks (page 2-4)
7) Tire pressure (page 11-35)
8) Flat tires (page 9-4)
9) Snow tires (page 8-10)
10) Front fog light switch (page 3-37)
11) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)
12) Towing hook (page 9-14)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11
1) Rear window defogger button
(page 3-41)
2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-5)
3) Child safety locks (page 2-19)
4) Tie-down hook (page 9-14)
5) Trunk lid (page 2-21)
6) Rear gate (page 2-24)
7) Towing hook (page 9-14)
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13
1) Center console (page 6-5)
2) Cup holder (page 6-5)
3) Front power supply socket (page 6-7)
4) Glove box (page 6-4)
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
15
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Windshield wiper (page 3-39)
2) Mist (page 3-40)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-40)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-41)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-40)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-38)
7) Light control switch (page 3-34)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-37)
9) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-35)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-35)
11) Turn signal (page 3-36)
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
16
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
17
! U.S.-spec. vehicles (turbo models except WRX STI) 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-9)
2) Tachometer (page 3-9)
3) Speedometer (page 3-7)
4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-7)
5) Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-7)
6) Selector lever and gear position indicator
(AT models) (page 3-29)
7) Temperature gauge (page 3-10)
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
18
! U.S.-spec. vehicles (non-turbo models) 1) Tachometer (page 3-14)
2) Speedometer (page 3-13)
3) Fuel gauge (page 3-15)
4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-13)
5) Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-13)
6) Selector lever and gear position indicator
(AT models) (page 3-29)
7) Coolant temperature warning/indicator
light (page 3-20)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
19
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
20
! Except U.S.-spec. vehicles (turbo models except WRX STI) 1) Fuel gauge (page 3-9)
2) Tachometer (page 3-9)
3) Speedometer (page 3-7)
4) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-7)
5) Odometer/Trip meter (page 3-7)
6) Selector lever and gear position indicator
(AT models) (page 3-29)
7) Temperature gauge (page 3-10)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
21
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
22
& Warning and indicator lights Mark Name Page Mark Name Page
Mark Name Page AT OIL TEMP warning 3-21 Turn signal indicator 3-29
light (AT vehicles) lights
Seatbelt warning light 3-16 Rear differential oil High beam indicator 3-29
temperature warning 3-21 light
light (WRX STI)
Front passenger’s 3-16
seatbelt warning light Front fog light indicator
ABS warning light 3-23 light (if equipped) 3-30
SRS airbag system 3-18
warning light 2-3,
Brake system warning 3-24 Security indicator light
light 3-28
Front passenger’s
/ frontal airbag ON indi- 3-19
cator Door open warning Headlight indicator 3-30
light 3-25 light (if equipped)
Front passenger’s
/ frontal airbag OFF in- 3-19
dicator All-Wheel Drive warn- Cruise control indica- 3-29
ing light (AT vehicles) 3-26 tor light
CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunc- 3-19 Hill start assist warn-
tion indicator lamp Cruise control set in- 3-30
ing light (if equipped)/ dicator light
Coolant temperature Hill start assist OFF 3-25
low indicator light indicator light
(non-turbo models)/ (WRX STI) Low fuel warning light 3-25
Coolant temperature 3-20
Vehicle Dynamics
high warning light Control operation indi- 3-26
(non-turbo models) Low tire pressure
cator light (if equipped) warning light (U.S.- 3-22
Vehicle Dynamics spec. models)
Charge warning light 3-21 Control warning light
(if equipped)/Vehicle SPORT mode indica- 3-28
Dynamics Control tor light (AT vehicles)
Oil pressure warning OFF indicator light (if 3-26
3-21
light equipped)/Traction Shift-up indicator light 3-29
Control OFF indicator (WRX STI)
light (WRX STI)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
23
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
24
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
25
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a genuine SUBARU navigation system, the settings for some of
these functions can be changed using the monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the navigation
system.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-14
Monitoring start delay time (after closure 0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-16
of doors)
Impact sensor operation (only vehicles Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-18
with shock sensors (dealer option))
Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-17
Dome light illumination ON/OFF OFF 2-14
Remote keyless entry sys- Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7
tem
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-9
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats position when the SRS airbag with considerable speed and force
deploys could suffer very serious and can injure or even kill children,
injuries. Because the SRS airbag especially if they are 12 years of age
WARNING needs enough space for deploy- and under and are not restrained or
ment, the driver should always improperly restrained. Because chil-
. Never adjust the seat while driv- sit upright and well back in the dren are lighter and weaker than
ing to avoid the possibility of seat as far from the steering adults, their risk of being injured
loss of vehicle control and of wheel as practical while still from deployment is greater. For that
personal injury. maintaining full vehicle control reason, we strongly recommend
. Before adjusting the seat, make and the front passenger should that ALL children (including those
sure the hands and feet of rear move the seat as far back as in child seats and those that have
seat passengers and cargo are possible and sit upright and well outgrown child restraint devices) sit
clear of the adjusting mechan- back in the seat. in the REAR seat properly re-
ism. strained at all times in a child
. Seatbelts provide maximum re- restraint device or in a seatbelt,
straint when the occupant sits whichever is appropriate for the
well back and upright in the seat. child’s age, height and weight. Se-
To reduce the risk of sliding cure ALL types of child restraint
under the seatbelt in a collision, devices (including forward facing
the front seatbacks should be child seat) in the REAR seats at all
always used in the upright posi- times.
tion while the vehicle is running. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
If the front seatbacks are not CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
used in the upright position in a SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
collision, the risk of sliding under INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
the lap belt and of the lap belt BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
sliding up over the abdomen will TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
increase, and both can result in According to accident statistics,
serious internal injury or death. WARNING children are safer when properly
. The SRS airbags deploy with Put children aged 12 and under in restrained in the rear seating posi-
considerable speed and force. the rear seat properly restrained at tions than in the front seating posi-
Occupants who are out of proper all times. The SRS airbag deploys tions. For instructions and precau-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3
WARNING
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
seatback to the desired position. Then To prevent the passenger from slid-
release the lever and make sure the ing under the seatbelt in the event of
seatback is securely locked into place. a collision, always put the seatback
The seatback placed in a reclined position in the upright position while the
can spring back upward with force when vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to the lever is pulled. While operating the place objects such as cushions
the desired position. Then release the lever to return the seatback, hold the between the passenger and the
lever and move the seat back and forth to seatback lightly so that it may be raised seatback. If you do so, the risk of
make sure that it is securely locked into back gradually. sliding under the lap belt and of the
place. lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Seat cushion height adjust- & Head restraint adjustment (if that the vehicle is struck from the
ment (driver’s seat) equipped) rear.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
1) HI – Rapid heating
can cause battery discharge.
2) LO – Normal heating
3) OFF – Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” dial forward until the “ ” mark reaches the Rear seats
or “HI” position on the switch, as desired, desired position. Each heater warms the
depending on the temperature. seat most quickly with the “ ” mark on the
Selecting the “HI” position will cause the adjustment dial in the furthest-forward
seat to heat up quicker. position. An indicator light next to the
adjustment dial for each seat heater
The indicator located on the switch illumi- illuminates when that seat heater is
nates when the seat heater is in operation. activated.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle, enough or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn the switch off. always turn the adjustment dial to the
most rearward position so that the “ ”
& Type B seat heater mark reaches to the “OFF” position.
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
Each seat heater has four levels of abdomen will increase, and both can
adjustment. To use the heater in the result in serious internal injury or
right-hand seat, turn the “R” adjustment death.
dial forward until the “ ” mark reaches the
desired position. To activate the heater in
the left-hand seat, turn the “L” adjustment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7
WARNING CAUTION
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge
of the armrest. The head restraint is not intended to
Never stack luggage or other cargo
be used at the lowest position.
higher than the top of the seatback
WARNING Before sitting on the seat, raise the
because it could tumble forward and
head restraint to the click position.
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident. To avoid the possibility of serious
injury, passengers must never be
allowed to sit on the center armrest
while the vehicle is in motion.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
When the seats are not occupied, lower
the head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
! Rear center seating position
1) When not used (lowest position) CAUTION 1) When not used (lowest position)
2) When used (click position) 2) When used (click position)
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the click position.
To raise: To raise:
Pull the head restraint up. Pull the head restraint up.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
In this case, perform the following steps to Seatbelts the rear seat properly restrained
fold the seatback down again. at all times. The SRS airbag
1. Open the trunk lid. Refer to “Trunk lid & Seatbelt safety tips deploys with considerable speed
(4-door)” F2-21. and force and can injure or even
2. Access the lock release strap from the WARNING kill children, especially if they are
trunk, and fold the seatback forward while 12 years of age and under and
pulling the strap down. . All persons in the vehicle should are not restrained or improperly
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE restrained. Because children are
! 5-door models the vehicle starts to move. Other- lighter and weaker than adults,
wise, the possibility of serious their risk of being injured from
1. Lower the head restraints. injury becomes greater in the deployment is greater. For that
event of a sudden stop or acci- reason, we strongly recommend
dent. that ALL children (including
. All belts should fit snugly in order those in child seats and those
to provide full restraint. Loose that have outgrown child re-
fitting belts are not as effective in straint devices) sit in the REAR
preventing or reducing injury. seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
. Each seatbelt is designed to or in a seatbelt, whichever is
support only one person. Never appropriate for the child’s height
use a single belt for two or more and weight.
persons – even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious Secure ALL types of child re-
injury or death could result. straint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in the
2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the . Replace all seatbelt assemblies REAR seats at all times.
release knob and then fold the seatback including retractors and attach-
down. ing hardware worn by occupants NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
of a vehicle that has been in a FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
To return the seatback to its original FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
position, raise the seatback until it locks serious accident. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
into place and make sure that it is securely THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
locked. if damage is not obvious.
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
. Put children aged 12 and under in THE SRS AIRBAG.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11
According to accident statistics, tions only) and then if necessary move the & Emergency Locking Retrac-
children are safer when properly child closer to the belt buckle to help tor (ELR)
restrained in the rear seating provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must
be taken to securely place the lap belt as The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
positions than in the front seat- Locking Retractor (ELR).
ing positions. For instructions low as possible on the hips and not on the
and precautions concerning the child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the The emergency locking retractor allows
child restraint system, refer to belt cannot be properly positioned, a child normal body movement but the retractor
“Child restraint systems” F1-23. restraint system should be used. Never locks automatically during a sudden stop,
place the shoulder belt under the child’s impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash arm or behind the child’s back. out of the retractor.
sensing and diagnostic module, which will ! Expectant mothers
record the use of the seatbelt by the front & Automatic/Emergency Lock-
passenger when any of the SRS frontal, ing Retractor (A/ELR)
side and curtain airbags deploy. Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
! Infants or small children matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking
Use a child restraint system that is Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
restraint systems” F1-23. ELR has an additional locking mode
! Children “Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
If a child is too big for a child restraint mode” intended to secure a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
and be restrained using the seatbelts. out completely and is then retracted even
According to accident statistics, children slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
are safer when properly restrained in the that position and the seatbelt cannot be
Expectant mothers also need to use the extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
rear seating positions than in the front seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
seating positions. Never allow a child to will be heard which indicate the retractor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
stand up or kneel on the seat. should be worn securely and as low as retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses possible over the hips, not over the waist.
the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt When securing a child restraint system on
anchor height (window-side seating posi- the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,
the seatbelt must be changed over to the
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13
The warning light(s) for unfastened to fail. seat are locked into place securely by
seatbelt(s) will alternate between . Do not install any accessory such as a moving the seat back and forth.
steady illumination and flashing at table or TV onto the seatback.
15-second intervals. The chime will If the seatbelt warning device for front
. Do not store a heavy load in the passenger’s seat still does not function
not sound. seatback pocket.
– At speeds higher than approxi- correctly after taking relevant corrective
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to actions described above, immediately
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) place his/her hands or legs on the front
The warning light(s) for unfastened contact your SUBARU dealer for an
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to inspection.
seatbelt(s) will alternate between pull the seatback.
flashing and steady illumination at
. Do not use front seats with their back- & Fastening the seatbelt
15-second intervals and the chime
ward-forward position and seatback not
will sound while the warning light(s)
being locked into place securely. If any of WARNING
is/are flashing.
them are not locked securely, adjust them
. It is possible to cancel the warning
operation that follows the 6-second
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to . Never use a belt that is twisted or
“Front seats” F1-2. reversed. In an accident, this can
warning after turning ON the ignition
switch. When the ignition switch is If the seatbelt warning device for the front increase the risk or severity of
turned ON next time, however, the passenger’s seat does not function cor- injury.
complete sequence of the warning rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the . Keep the lap belt as low as
operation resumes. For further details front passenger’s seat is empty or it is possible on your hips. In a colli-
about canceling the warning operation, deactivated even when the front passen- sion, this spreads the force of the
please contact your SUBARU dealer. ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), lap belt over stronger hip bones
take the following actions. instead of across the weaker
If there is no passenger on the front
. Ensure that no article is placed on the abdomen.
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
device for the front passenger’s seat will seat other than a child restraint system . Seatbelts provide maximum re-
be deactivated. The front passenger’s and the child occupant, although we straint when the occupant sits
occupant detection system monitors strongly recommended that all children well back and upright in the seat.
whether or not there is a passenger on sit in the rear seat properly restrained. To reduce the risk of sliding
the front passenger’s seat. . Ensure that there is no article left in the under the seatbelt in a collision,
Observe the following precautions. Failure seatback pocket. the front seatbacks should be
to do so may prevent the device from . Ensure that the backward-forward po- always used in the upright posi-
functioning correctly or cause the device sition and seatback of front passenger’s tion while the vehicle is running.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
If the front seatbacks are not slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
used in the upright position in a
WARNING let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
collision, the risk of sliding under Never place the shoulder belt under strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
the lap belt and of the lap belt the arm or behind the back. If an
sliding up over the abdomen will accident occurs, this can increase
increase, and both can result in the risk or severity of injury.
serious internal injury or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants CAUTION
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
under the lap belt and of the lap become very hot in a vehicle that
belt sliding up over the abdomen has been closed up in sunny weath-
will increase, and both can result er; they could burn an occupant. Do
in serious internal injury or not touch such hot parts until they
death. cool.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
! Front seatbelts until you hear a click.
1. Adjust the seat position:
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more 5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15
the shoulder belt. Pull down on the anchor to make sure that ! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
it is locked in place. seatbelt on 5-door models)
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist. 1. Sit well back in the seat.
WARNING 2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
When wearing the seatbelts, make
belt anchor height the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
sure the shoulder portion of the
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
webbing does not pass over your
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
anchor to a lower position. Placing
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
the shoulder belt over the neck may
again.
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17
WARNING WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web- Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
bing twisted can increase the risk or to the respective buckles. If the
severity of injury in an accident. seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
When fastening the belt after it is belt (with the connector’s tongue
pulled out from the retractor, espe- plate not fastened to the connec-
cially when inserting the connec- tor’s buckle on the right-hand side),
tor’s tongue plate into the mating it cannot properly restrain the wear-
buckle (on right-hand side), always er in position in an accident, possi-
check that the webbing is not bly resulting in serious injury or
twisted. death.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
3. After confirming that the webbing is not 4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
twisted, insert the connector (tongue) into the center seatbelt buckle marked
attached at the webbing end into the “CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
buckle on the right-hand side until a click clicks.
is heard. Push the release button of the center
If the belt stops before reaching the seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it unfasten the seatbelt.
out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
NOTE
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly When the seatback is folded down for
again. greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Seatbelt maintenance Front seatbelt pretensioners small amount of smoke will be released.
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap These occurrences are normal and not
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
the belts because this could seriously fire in the vehicle.
affect their strength. Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
including the webbing and all hardware locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, be pulled out and retracted and therefore
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas. must be replaced.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor NOTE
damage is found.
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
CAUTION signed to activate in minor frontal
impacts, in side or rear impacts or in
. Keep the belts free of polishes, roll-over accidents.
oils, chemicals and particularly The driver’s and front passenger’s seat- . The driver’s seat and passenger’s
battery acid. belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The seat pretensioners and frontal SRS
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be airbag operate simultaneously.
. Never attempt to make modifica- activated in the event of an accident . Pretensioners are designed to func-
tions or changes that will prevent involving a moderate to severe frontal tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
the seatbelt from operating prop- collision. event that a pretensioner is activated,
erly.
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
The pretensioner sensor also serves as
seatbelt retractor assemblies must be
the frontal SRS airbag sensor. If the
replaced only by an authorized
sensor detects a certain predetermined
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
amount of force during a frontal collision,
belt retractor assemblies, use only
the front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in
genuine SUBARU parts.
by the retractor to take up the slack so that
. If either front seatbelt does not
the belt more effectively restrains the front
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
seat occupant.
a malfunction or activation of the
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated, pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
an operating noise will be heard and a dealer as soon as possible.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem- ping the entire vehicle due to
bly or surrounding area has been collision damage or for other
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer reasons, consult your SUBARU
as soon as possible. dealer.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him & System monitors
to the contents of this section.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seat- SRS airbag system warning light (non-
belts properly fastened. Refer to turbo models)
“Seatbelts” F1-10. A diagnostic system continually monitors
. Do not modify, remove or strike the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
the front seatbelt retractor as- while the vehicle is being driven. The
semblies or surrounding area. seatbelt pretensioners share the control
This could result in accidental module with the SRS airbag system.
activation of the seatbelt preten- SRS airbag system warning light (turbo Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a
sioners or could make the sys- models) seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag
tem inoperative, possibly result- system warning light will illuminate. The
ing in serious injury. Seatbelt SRS airbag system warning light will show
pretensioners have no user-ser- normal system operation by lighting for
viceable parts. For required ser- approximately 6 seconds when the igni-
vicing of front seatbelt retractors tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
equipped with seatbelt preten- The following components are monitored
s i o n e r s , s e e y o u r n ea r e s t by the indicator:
SUBARU dealer.
. Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
. When discarding front seatbelt . Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
retractor assemblies or scrap-
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
. Airbag control module (including im- control module & System servicing
pact sensors) . Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
. Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) and OFF indicator WARNING
. Frontal airbag module (front passen- . All related wiring
ger’s side) . When discarding a seatbelt re-
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar right- WARNING tractor assembly or scrapping
hand side) the entire vehicle damaged by a
If the warning light exhibits any of collision, consult your SUBARU
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar left- the following conditions, there may dealer.
hand side) be a malfunction in the seatbelt
. Side airbag module (driver’s side) . Tampering with or disconnecting
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag the system’s wiring could result
. Side airbag module (front passenger’s system. Immediately take your vehi- in accidental activation of the
side) cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer seatbelt pretensioner and/or
. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel to have the system checked. Unless SRS airbag or could make the
house right-hand side) checked and properly repaired, the system inoperative, which may
. Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS result in serious injury. Do not
house left-hand side) airbag will not operate properly in use electrical test equipment on
. Curtain airbag module (right side) the event of a collision, which may any circuit related to the seatbelt
increase the risk of injury.
. Curtain airbag module (left side) pretensioner and SRS airbag
. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear . Flashing or flickering of the warn- systems. For required servicing
center seat) ing light of the seatbelt pretensioner, con-
. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side) . No illumination of the warning sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
light when the ignition switch is er.
. Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-
ger’s side) first turned to the “ON” position
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen- . Continuous illumination of the
ger’s side) warning light
. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension . Illumination of the warning light
sensor while driving
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
properly secured in the vehicle. When child from injury in a collision, or in an accident and can be injured
installing the child restraint system, care- because the child will be caught seriously.
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions. between the passenger and objects Additionally, children standing up or
inside the vehicle. kneeling on or in front of the front
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the Additionally, holding a child in your seat are exposed another serious
rear seating positions than in the front lap or arms in the front seat exposes danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
seating positions. that child to another serious danger. ploys with considerable speed and
Since the SRS airbag deploys with force, the child could be injured or
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces considerable speed and force, the even killed.
require that infants and small children be child could be injured or even killed.
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is & Where to place a child re-
moving. straint system
The following are SUBARU’s recommen-
dations on where to place a child restraint
system in your vehicle.
WARNING
WARNING Children should be properly re-
strained at all times. Never allow a
Never let a passenger hold a child child to stand up, or to kneel on any
on his or her lap or in his or her seat. Unrestrained children will be
arms while the vehicle is moving. thrown forward during sudden stop
The passenger cannot protect the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25
A: Front passenger’s seat In this seating position, you should use For that reason, be sure to secure
You should not install a child restraint only a child restraint system that has a ALL types of child restraint devices
system (including a booster seat) due to bottom base that fits snugly against the (including forward facing child
the hazard to children posed by the contours of the seat cushion and can be seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
passenger’s airbag. securely retained using the seatbelt. You should choose a restraint de-
If it is unavoidable to install a child vice which is appropriate for the
B: Rear seat, window-side seating restraint system in the rear seat’s center child’s age, height and weight. Ac-
positions seating position, lower the center head cording to accident statistics, chil-
Recommended positions for all types of restraint to the lowest position and install dren are safer when properly re-
child restraint systems. the child restraint system by correctly strained in the rear seating posi-
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency passing the rear center seatbelt through tions than in the front seating posi-
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and the belt guide. tions.
lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
installing a child restraint system. WARNING
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection Put children aged 12 and under in
of the seat cushion. the rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag deploys
In this seating position, you should use
with considerable speed and force
only a child restraint system that has a
and can injure or even kill children,
bottom base that fits snugly against the
especially if they are 12 years of age
contours of the seat cushion and can be
and under and are not restrained or
securely retained using the seatbelt.
improperly restrained. Because chil-
C: Rear seat, center seating position dren are lighter and weaker than
Installing a child restraint system is not adults, their risk of being injured
recommended, although the A/ELR seat- from deployment is greater.
belt and an upper anchorage (tether
anchorage) (except in Latin American WARNING
models) are provided in this position.
Some types of child restraints might not be SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
able to be secured firmly due to projection EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S
of the seat cushion. SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A
R E A R WA R D F A C I N G C H I L D
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS- looking for the label on the child restraint CAUTION
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS system or the manufacturer’s statement of
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO compliance in the document attached to When you install a child restraint
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE the system. system, follow the manufacturer’s
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO Also it is important for you to make sure instructions supplied with it. After
THE SRS AIRBAG. that the child restraint system is compa- installing the child restraint system,
tible with the vehicle in which it will be check to ensure that it is held
used. securely in position. If it is not held
& Choosing a child restraint tight and secure, the danger of your
system & Installing child restraint sys- child suffering personal injury in the
tems with A/ELR seatbelt event of an accident may be in-
creased.
WARNING
! Installing a rearward facing child
. Child restraint systems and seat- restraint
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Choose a child restraint system that is Unsecured child restraint sys-
appropriate for the child’s age and size tems can be thrown around in-
(weight and height) in order to provide the side of the vehicle in a sudden
child with proper protection. The child stop, turn or accident; they can
restraint system should meet all applic- strike and injure vehicle occu-
able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi- pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child. 1. Place the child restraint system in the
cle Safety Standards for the United States
rear seating position.
or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards for Canada. It can be identified by 2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27
6. Push and pull the child restraint 8. To remove the child restraint system,
system forward and from side to side to press the release button on the seatbelt
check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a buckle and allow the belt to retract
child restraint can be more firmly secured completely. The belt will return to the
by pushing it down into the seat cushion ELR mode.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. and then tightening the seatbelt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt WARNING
retractor to change the retractor over from to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) properly functioning). NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind PASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
clicks will be heard which indicate the TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
retractor functions as ALR. CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt. 6. Before having a child sit in the child
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the restraint system, move it back and forth
retractor to change the retractor over from and right and left to check if it is firmly
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) secured. Sometimes a child restraint can
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) be more firmly secured by pushing it down
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind into the seat cushion and then tightening
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding, the seatbelt.
clicks will be heard which indicate the 7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
retractor functions as ALR. to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
1. Place the child restraint system in the properly functioning).
rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s Some types of child restraint systems can Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
instructions supplied with it. After be installed on the rear seat of your anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
installing the child restraint system, vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
check to ensure that it is held child restraint systems are secured to the modating such child restraint systems.
securely in position. If it is not held designated anchorages provided on the
tight and secure, the danger of your vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
child suffering personal injury in the chorages are sometimes referred to as the
event of an accident may be in- LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
creased. Tethers for CHildren).
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
the rear seat window-side seating posi- 1. Use the “ ” marks to locate the two
tions. For each window-side seating posi- lower anchorages (bars) for the position
tion, two lower anchorages are provided. where you want to install the child restraint
Each lower anchorage is located where system.
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35
4-door models
4-door models
1. Remove the head restraint at the
window-side seating position where the
child restraint system has been installed
with the lower anchorages or seatbelt; lift
up the head restraint while pressing the
release button. Store the head restraint in
the trunk (4-door) or cargo area (5-door).
Avoid placing the head restraint in the
passenger compartment to prevent it from
being thrown around in the passenger 5-door models
compartment in a sudden stop or a sharp
turn. 2. Open the cover for the appropriate
upper anchorage.
5-door models
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
3. Attach the child restraint top tether *SRS airbag (Supplemental gers)
hook to the appropriate upper anchorage.
Restraint System airbag) These SRS airbags are designed only
4. Tighten the top tether securely.
as a supplement to the primary protec-
Please contact your SUBARU dealer if *SRS: This stands for supplemental re- tion provided by the seatbelt.
you have any question regarding the straint system. This name is used be-
The system also controls front seatbelt
installation of a child restraint system. cause the airbag system supplements the
pretensioners. For operation instructions
vehicle’s seatbelts.
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
CAUTION Your vehicle is equipped with a crash pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
sensing and diagnostic module, which will tensioners” F1-20.
Always remove the head restraint
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
when mounting a child restraint WARNING
passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
system with a top tether. Otherwise,
side and curtain airbags deploys.
the top tether cannot be fastened . To obtain maximum protection in
tightly. the event of an accident, the
& Vehicle with SRS airbags and driver and all passengers in the
lap/shoulder restraints for vehicle should always wear seat-
driver, front passenger, and belts when the vehicle is moving.
window-side rear passengers The SRS airbag is designed only
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple- as a supplement to the primary
mental restraint system in addition to a protection provided by the seat-
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating belt. It does not do away with the
position and each rear window-side seat- need to fasten seatbelts. In com-
ing positions. The supplemental restraint bination with the seatbelts, it
system (SRS) consists of six airbags. offers the best combined protec-
The configurations are as follows: tion in case of a serious accident.
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal Not wearing a seatbelt increases
airbags the chance of severe injury or
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side death in a crash even when the
airbags vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas- For instructions and precautions
senger, and window-side rear passen- concerning the seatbelt system,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39
1) Airbag control module (including impact 5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
sensors) 6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side) 7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s side)
side) 8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) side)
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41
WARNING WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in The SRS airbag deploys with con-
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys siderable speed and force. Occu-
with considerable force and can pants who are out of proper position
injure or even kill the child. when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Be-
cause the SRS airbag needs enough WARNING
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well Do not put any objects over the
back in the seat as far from the steering wheel pad and dashboard.
steering wheel as practical while If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
still maintaining full vehicle control those objects could interfere with its
and the front passenger should proper operation and could be pro-
move the seat as far back as pelled inside the vehicle and cause
possible and sit upright and well injury.
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43
warning light will illuminate. Have the ! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
system inspected by your SUBARU deal- OFF indicators airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
er immediately if the SRS airbag system vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
warning light illuminates. If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
may affect the proper function of the ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system. indicator will remain off.
Have your vehicle inspected at your If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
SUBARU dealer. is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
NOTE the OFF indicator will illuminate.
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag, With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre- position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
tensioner are not controlled by the tors remain illuminated or off simulta-
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys- neously even after the system check
tem. ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON period, the system is malfunctioning.
indicator Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ately for an inspection.
OFF indicator
! Conditions in which front passen-
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
and OFF indicators show you the status of activated
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
The indicators are located next to the will not be activated when any of the
clock in the center portion of the dash- following conditions are met regarding the
board. front passenger’s seat:
When the ignition switch is turned to the . The seat is empty.
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
. The seat is equipped with a rearward
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
facing child restraint system and an infant
which time the system is checked. Follow-
is restrained with it. (See WARNING that
ing the system check, both indicators turn
follows.)
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the . The seat is equipped with a forward
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
facing child restraint system and a small passenger’s seat may be killed or ! If the front passenger’s frontal air-
child is restrained with it. (See WARNING severely injured should the front bag ON indicator illuminates and the
that follows.) passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de- OFF indicator turns off even when
. The seat is equipped with a booster ploy. REAR seats are the safest an infant or a small child is in a child
seat and a small child is in the booster place for children. restraint system (including booster
seat. (See WARNING that follows.) seat)
. The seat is relieved of the occupant When the front passenger’s seat is occu- Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
load for a time exceeding the predeter- pied by a child, observe the following position if the front passenger’s frontal
mined monitoring time period. precautions. Failure to do so may increase airbag ON indicator illuminates and the
. The seat is occupied by a child who the load on the front passenger’s seat, OFF indicator turns off even when an
has outgrown a child restraint system activating the front passenger’s SRS infant or a small child is in a child restraint
(See WARNING that follows.) or by a frontal airbag even though that seat is system (including booster seat). Remove
small adult. occupied by a child. the child restraint system from the seat. By
. The front passenger’s occupant detec- . Do not place any article on the seat referring to the child restraint manufac-
tion system is malfunctioning. other than the child occupant and a child turer’s recommendations as well as the
restraint system. child restraint system installation proce-
WARNING . Do not place more than one child on dures in “Child restraint systems” F1-23,
the seat. correctly install the child restraint system.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA- . Do not install any accessory such as a Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT table or TV onto the seatback. position and make sure that the front
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE . Do not store a heavy load in the passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON- seatback pocket. turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
sure to install it in the REAR seat in
place his/her hands or legs on the front while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
a correct manner. Also, it is strongly
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to following actions.
recommended that any forward fa-
pull the seatback. . Ensure that no article is placed on the
cing child seat or booster seat be
installed in the REAR seat, and that seat other than the child restraint system
even children who have outgrown a and the child occupant.
child restraint system be also . Ensure that there is no article left in the
seated in the REAR seat. This is seatback pocket.
because children sitting in the front . Ensure that the backward-forward po-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45
sition and seatback of front passenger’s above have been taken, seat the child/ lift the front passenger’s seat cushion
seat are locked into place securely by small adult in the rear seat and im- using his/her feet.
moving the seat back and forth. mediately contact your SUBARU dealer . Do not place any article under the front
for an inspection. Even if the system passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated has passed the dealer inspection, it is from behind and under the seat. This may
while the OFF indicator turns off after recommended that on subsequent trips lift the seat cushion.
taking relevant corrective actions de- the child/small adult always take the
scribed above, relocate the child restraint . Do not squeeze any article between
rear seat. the front passenger’s seat and side trim/
system to the rear seat and immediately
contact your SUBARU dealer for an Children who have outgrown a child pillar, door or center console box. This
inspection. restraint system should always wear the may lift the seat cushion.
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
NOTE is deactivated or activated. ! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
When a child who has outgrown a child ! Conditions in which front passen- indicator illuminates and the ON
restraint system or a small adult is ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated indicator turns off even when the
seated in the front passenger’s seat, front passenger’s seat is occupied
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag by an adult
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon
system may or may not activate the impact when any of the following condi- This can be caused by the adult incor-
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag tions are met regarding the front passen- rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
depending on the occupant’s seating ger’s seat. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
posture. If the front passenger’s SRS position. Ask the front passenger to set
. When the seat is occupied by an adult. the seatback to the upright position, sit up
frontal airbag is activated (the ON
indicator remains illuminated while . When a heavy article is placed on the straight in the center of the seat cushion,
the OFF indicator turns off), take the seat. correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
following actions. When the front passenger’s seat is occu- her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
. Ensure that no article is placed on pied by an adult, observe the following the rearmost position. Turn the ignition
the seat other than the occupant. precautions. Failure to do so may lessen switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF
. Ensure that there is no article left in the load on the front passenger’s seat, indicator remains illuminated while the ON
the seatback pocket. deactivating the front passenger’s SRS indicator remains off, take the following
frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat actions.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
is occupied by an adult. . Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
nated while the OFF indicator turns off position.
despite the fact that the actions noted . Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
. Ensure that there are no articles,
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
books, shoes, or other objects trapped the following SUBARU distributors: you bought your vehicle.
under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or
on the side of the seat. <Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s Subaru of America, Inc.
seat are locked into place securely by Customer Dealer Services Department
moving the seat back and forth. P.O. Box 6000
. Next, turn the ignition switch to the Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow 1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
the system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both indica- <Hawaii>
tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
indicator should illuminate while the OFF 2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
indicator remains off. HI 96819
808-839-2273
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off, <Guam>
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
and immediately contact your SUBARU bile
dealer for an inspection. 491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
! Effect vehicle modifications made Guam
for persons with disabilities may 671-633-2698
have on SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system operation (U.S. only) <Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper, P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
front side frame, radiator panel, instrument 00910
panel, combination meter, steering wheel, 787-793-2828
steering column, tire, suspension or floor There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
panel can affect the operation of the tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
SUBARU advanced airbag system. If in such an area, please contact the
you have any questions, you may contact SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
The two inflators of each airbag are a fire in the vehicle. level differs from one type of collision to
triggered either sequentially or simulta- another, and it may have no bearing on
neously, depending on the severity of CAUTION the visible damage done to the vehicle
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS itself.
frontal airbag and depending on the Do not touch the SRS airbag system
severity of impact and the total load on components around the steering ! Example of accident in which the
the seat in the case of the front passen- wheel and dashboard with bare driver’s/driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag. hands right after deployment. Doing ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most
so can cause burns because the likely deploy.
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme- components can be very hot as a
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s result of deployment.
vision is not obstructed. The time required
from detecting impact to the deflation of The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
the SRS airbag after deployment is short- passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
er than the blink of an eye. signed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
frontal collision. It is basically not designed
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
to deploy in lesser frontal impacts be-
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
cause the necessary protection can be
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
pretensioners operate at the same time.
are basically not designed to deploy in
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS side or rear impacts or in roll-over acci-
airbag would activate in a non-accident dents because deployment of only the A head-on collision against a thick con-
situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
and will not interfere with the driver’s would not help the occupant in those only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
ability to maintain control of the vehicle. situations. The driver’s and front passen- driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, function on a one-time-only basis.
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
some smoke will be released. These SRS airbag deployment depends on the frontal impact similar in fashion and
occurrences are a normal result of the level of force experienced in the passen- magnitude to the collision described
deployment. This smoke does not indicate ger compartment during a collision. That above.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49
! Examples of the types of accidents Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
in which it is possible that the both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
driver’s/driver’s and front passen- frontal airbags may be activated when the
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de- vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
ploy. undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur. 2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51
There are many types of collisions which ! Examples of the types of accidents to deploy if the vehicle is struck from the
might not necessarily require deployment in which the driver’s/driver’s and side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s front passenger’s SRS frontal side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of airbag(s) will basically not deploy. speed frontal collision.
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS activated on the first impact, it/they will not
frontal airbags are designed basically not be activated on the second impact.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& SRS side airbag and SRS do not do away with the need to if your head or other parts of the
curtain airbag fasten seatbelts. It is also important body are too close to the SRS
to wear your seatbelt to help avoid side airbag.
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door injuries that can result when an
side of each front seat seatback, which . Since your vehicle is equipped
occupant is not seated in a proper with SRS curtain airbags, do not
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label. upright position. sit or lean unnecessarily close to
In a moderate to severe side impact
the front or rear door on either
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
side. Also, do not put your head,
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
arms and hands out of the win-
between the occupant and the door panel
dow. The SRS curtain airbag on
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
each side of the cabin is stored in
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
the roof side (between the front
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
pillar and a point over the rear
for front seat occupants.
seat), and it provides protection
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of by deploying rapidly (faster than
the cabin is stored in the roof side the blink of an eye) in the event of
(between the front pillar and a point over a side impact. However, the force
the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is of its deployment may cause
located at the top of each center pillar. injuries if your head is too close
In a moderate to severe side impact to it.
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys WARNING
between the occupant and the side
window and supplements the seatbelt by . Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
reducing the impact on the occupant’s close to either front door. The
head. SRS side airbag is stored in both
front seat seatbacks next to the
WARNING door, and it provides protection
by deploying rapidly (faster than
The SRS side airbag and SRS the blink of an eye) in the event of
curtain airbag are designed as only a side impact collision. However,
a supplement to the primary protec- the force of SRS side airbag
tion provided by the seatbelt. They deployment may cause injuries
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53
WARNING
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat facing
the side window or to wrap his/
her arms around the front seat
seatback. In the event of an
accident, the force of the SRS
side airbag deployment could
injure the child seriously be-
cause his/her head or arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag.
WARNING Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
Do not rest your arm on either front ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
door or its internal trim. It could be aged 12 and under should be
injured in the event of SRS side placed in the rear seat anyway
airbag deployment. and should be properly re-
strained at all times.
. Never allow a child to kneel on
any passenger’s seat facing the
side window or put their head,
arms and hands out of the win-
dow. In the event of an accident,
the force of the SRS curtain
airbag deployment could injure
the child seriously because his/
her head is close to the SRS
curtain airbag.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
A hands-free microphone or
other accessory in such a loca-
WARNING
tion could be propelled through Do not put any kind of cover or
the cabin with great force by the clothes or other objects over either
curtain airbag, or it could prevent front seatback and do not attach
correct deployment of the curtain labels or stickers to the front seat
airbag. In either case, the result surface on or near the SRS side
could be serious injuries. airbag. They could prevent proper
. Never hang or place coat hangers deployment of the SRS side airbag,
or other hard or pointed objects reducing protection available to the
near the side windows. If such front seat’s occupant.
items are present when the SRS
curtain airbags deploy, they ! Operation
could be thrown through the
WARNING passenger compartment and
. Do not attach accessories to the cause serious injuries. They
door trim or near either SRS side could also prevent proper opera-
airbags and do not place objects tion of the SRS curtain airbags.
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of the SRS side airbag
deployment, they could be pro-
pelled dangerously toward the
vehicle’s occupants and cause
injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
phone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
pillar, the windshield, a side win- airbag can function only when the ignition
dow, an assist grip, or any other switch is in the “ON” position.
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag. The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
side airbags and SRS curtain airbags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55
deploy independently of each other since immediately starts to deflate. The time system (from the front pillar to the
each has its own impact sensor. There- required from detection of an impact to part of the roof side over the rear
fore, they may not both deploy in the same deflation of an SRS side airbag after seat). Doing so can cause burns
accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and deployment is shorter than the blink of because the components can be
SRS curtain airbag deploys independently an eye. very hot as a result of deployment.
of the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
frontal airbags in the steering wheel and for a while following deployment then The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
instrument panel. slowly deflates. airbag are designed to deploy in the event
of an accident involving a moderate to
An impact sensor, which senses impact The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain severe side impact collision. It is basically
force, is located in each of the left and airbag deploy even when no one occupies not designed to deploy in a lesser side
right center pillars and rear wheel houses. the seat on the side on which an impact is impact. Also, it is basically not designed to
Another impact sensor, which also senses applied. deploy in frontal or rear impacts because
impact force, is located under the rear
When the SRS side airbag and SRS SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
center seat. If one of the center pillar
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud deployment would not help the occupant
impact sensors and the impact sensor that
inflation noise will be heard and some in those situations.
is located under the rear center seat
together sense an impact force above a smoke will be released. These occur- Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
predetermined level in a side collision, the rences are a normal result of the deploy- airbag are designed to function on a one-
control module causes both the SRS side ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire time-only basis.
airbag and curtain airbag on the impacted in the vehicle.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
side to inflate regardless of whether the deployment depend on the level of force
rear wheel house impact sensor on the CAUTION
experienced in the passenger compart-
same side senses an impact. If one of the Do not touch the SRS side airbag ment during a side impact collision. That
rear wheel house impact sensors and the system components around the level differs from one type of collision to
impact sensor that is located under the front seat seatback with bare hands another, and it may have no bearing on
rear center seat together sense an impact right after deployment. Doing so can the visible damage done to the vehicle
force above a predetermined level, the cause burns because the compo- itself.
control module causes only the SRS nents can be very hot as a result of
curtain airbag on the impacted side to deployment.
inflate.
After deployment, do not touch any
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag part of the SRS curtain airbag
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
curtain airbag are unlikely to deploy. 2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy-
ment. In the event of accidents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents 2) The vehicle is struck from behind. and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
in which the SRS side airbag and The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain the first impact, they will not be activated
SRS curtain airbag will basically not airbag are basically not designed to on the second.
deploy. deploy if the vehicle is involved in a frontal
collision or is struck from behind. Exam- & SRS airbag system monitors
ples of such accidents are illustrated.
Turbo models
1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision immediately followed by another from the
with another vehicle (moving or station- same direction, once the SRS side airbag
ary).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& SRS airbag system servicing . Under the center console the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
. On both the right and left sides at driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
WARNING the front of the vehicle frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
. When discarding an airbag mod- . Steering wheel and column and cover over the front passenger’s SRS
ule or scrapping the entire vehi- nearby areas frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
cle damaged by a collision, con- . Top of the dashboard on front the front pillar to a point over the rear
sult your SUBARU dealer. passenger’s side and nearby seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
. The SRS airbag has no user- areas wise damaged.
serviceable parts. Do not use . Each front seat and nearby area . Center pillar, rear wheel house or
rear sub frame, or an area near these
electrical test equipment on any . Inside each center pillar
circuit related to the SRS airbag parts, was involved in an accident in
. In each roof side (from the front which the SRS side airbag and SRS
system. For required servicing of
pillar to a point over the rear seat) curtain airbag did not deploy.
the SRS airbag, see your nearest
SUBARU dealer. Tampering with . Between the rear seat cushion . The fabric or leather of either front
or disconnecting the system’s and rear wheel house on each seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
wiring could result in accidental side damaged.
inflation of the SRS airbag or . Under the rear center seat . The rear part of the vehicle was
could make the system inopera- involved in an accident in which no
tive, which may result in serious In the event that the SRS airbag is SRS airbag was deployed.
injury. deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author- & Precautions against vehicle
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo- modification
CAUTION nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU WARNING
If you need service or repair in areas parts.
indicated in the following list, have
. To avoid accidental activation of
an authorized SUBARU dealer per- NOTE the system or rendering the sys-
form the work. The SRS airbag In the following cases, contact your tem inoperative, which may re-
control module, impact sensors SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. sult in serious injury, no modifi-
and airbag modules are stored in . The front part of the vehicle was cations should be made to any
these areas. involved in an accident in which only components or wiring of the SRS
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-61
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2 Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-14
Key number plate ................................................ 2-2 If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................ 2-15 2
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-2
Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3 Arming the system ............................................ 2-15
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-3 Disarming the system ........................................ 2-16
Key replacement ................................................. 2-4 Valet mode ........................................................ 2-17
Passive arming .................................................. 2-17
Door locks ........................................................... 2-4
Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-18
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-4
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-18
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-5 Child safety locks .............................................. 2-19
Power door locking switches ............................. 2-6 Windows............................................................. 2-19
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-6 Power windows ................................................. 2-19
Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-7 Trunk lid (4-door) ............................................... 2-21
Locking the doors ............................................... 2-8 To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-22
Unlocking the doors ............................................ 2-8 To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-22
Opening the trunk lid/unlocking rear gate ............ 2-9 To lock and unlock the trunk lid release
lever................................................................ 2-22
Vehicle finder function......................................... 2-9
Internal trunk lid release handle ......................... 2-22
Sounding a panic alarm....................................... 2-9
Selecting audible signal operation ....................... 2-9 Rear gate (5-door).............................................. 2-24
Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-10 Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-25
Replacing lost transmitters ................................. 2-10 Moonroof switches ............................................ 2-26
Alarm system ..................................................... 2-14 Sun shade ......................................................... 2-27
System operation ............................................... 2-14
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-2 Keys and doors
Keys and driver’s door lock. You can keep the Immobilizer
trunk and glove box locked when you
leave your vehicle and valet key at a The immobilizer system is designed to
parking facility. prevent an unauthorized person from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
CAUTION with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. Even if
Do not attach a large key holder or
an unregistered key fits into the ignition
key case to either key. If it bangs
switch and can be turned to the “START”
against your knees while you are
position, the engine will automatically stop
driving, it could turn the ignition
after several seconds.
switch from the “ON” position to the
“Acc” or “OFF” position, thereby Each immobilizer key contains a trans-
stopping the engine. ponder in which the key’s ID code is
stored. When a key is inserted into the
1) Master key (Black) ignition switch and turned to the “ON”
2) Submaster key (Black)
& Key number plate position, the transponder transmits the
3) Valet key (Gray) The key number is stamped on the key key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
4) Key number plate number plate attached to the key set. receiver. If the transmitted ID code
5) Security ID plate Write down the key number and keep it in matches the ID code registered in the
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This immobilizer system, the system allows the
Three types of keys are provided for your engine to be started. Since the ID code is
number is needed to make a replacement
vehicle: transmitted and acted upon almost in-
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
Master key, submaster key and valet key. vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement” F2-4. stantly, the immobilizer system does not
The master key and submaster key fit all impede normal starting of the engine.
locks on your vehicle. If the engine fails to start, pull out the key
. Ignition switch once before trying again. Refer to “Ignition
switch” F3-3.
. Driver’s door
. Trunk lid release lever (4-door) This device complies with Part 15 of
. Glove box the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
The valet key fits only the ignition switch to the following two conditions: (1) This
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-3
device may not cause harmful inter- . Do not get the key wet. If the key & Security indicator light
ference, and (2) this device must gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
accept any interference received, in- immediately.
cluding interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not ex- & Security ID plate
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
NOTE
To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the fol-
lowing security precautions:
. Never leave your vehicle unattended
Turbo models
with its keys inside.
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
windows and lock the doors and rear
gate. 1) Key number plate
. Do not leave spare keys or any 2) Security ID plate
record of your key number in the
vehicle. The security ID is stamped on the security
ID plate attached to the key set. Write
down the security ID and keep it in
CAUTION another safe place, not in the vehicle.
. Do not place the key under direct This number is needed to make a replace-
sunlight or anywhere it may ment key if you lose your key or lock it
become hot. inside the vehicle.
This number is also needed for replace-
ment or repair of the engine control unit, Non-turbo models
integrated unit, and combination meter. The security indicator light deters potential
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-4 Keys and doors
thieves by indicating that the vehicle is & Key replacement Door locks
equipped with an immobilizer system. It Your key number plate and security ID
begins flashing (approximately once every plate will be required if you ever need a & Locking and unlocking from
3 seconds) approximately 60 seconds replacement key made. Any new key must the outside
after the ignition switch is turned from the be registered for use with your vehicle’s
“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK” immobilizer system before it can be used.
position or immediately after the key is Up to four keys can be registered for use
pulled out. with one vehicle.
If the security indicator light does not flash, For security, all the keys registered with
the immobilizer system may be malfunc- your vehicle’s immobilizer system will
tioning. If this occurs, contact your have their ID codes erased and re-
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible. registered when a new key is made.
In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g. Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must
an imitation key), the security indicator be presented when a new key is regis-
light illuminates. tered. Any key that is not re-registered
when a new key is made cannot be used
NOTE after the other keys are re-registered. For
Even if the security indicator light information on replacement keys and on To lock the driver’s door from the outside
flashes irregularly or its fuse blows the registration of keys with your immo- with the key, turn the key toward the rear.
(the light does not flash if its fuse is bilizer system, contact your SUBARU To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
blown), the immobilizer system will dealer. front.
function normally.
NOTE Pull the outside door handle to open an
A vehicle that is equipped with the unlocked door.
remote engine start system as a dealer
option can register up to three keys for
use with one vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-5
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-6 Keys and doors
NOTE Power door locking switches doors from the outside using the power
. When leaving the vehicle, please door locking switches.
make sure that all doors and the rear
gate (5-door) are completely closed. & Key lock-in prevention func-
. The battery drainage prevention tion
function does not operate while the
key is in the ignition switch. This function prevents the doors from
being locked with the key still in the
ignition switch.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function operational
With the driver’s door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
door locking switch is pushed to the front
(“LOCK”) position.
1) Lock
2) Unlock ! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function non-operational
All doors and the rear gate (for 5-door) can . If the lock lever is turned to the rear
be locked and unlocked by the power door (“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
locking switches located at the driver’s open and the driver’s door is then closed
side and the front passenger’s side doors. with the lock lever in that position, the
To lock the doors, push the front side of driver’s door is locked.
the switch. . If the spare key is used to lock the
To unlock the doors, push the rear side of driver’s door from the outside of the
the switch. vehicle, the door is locked.
When you close the doors after you set This function’s operational/non-opera-
the door locks, the doors remain locked. tional setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
NOTE dealer for details.
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-7
NOTE Remote keyless entry system vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure The remote keyless entry system has the
you are holding the key before locking following functions.
the doors. CAUTION
. Locking and unlocking the doors (and
. Do not expose the transmitter to rear gate on the 5-door) without a key
severe shocks, such as those . Locking and unlocking the doors (and
experienced as a result of drop- trunk lid on the 4-door) without a key
ping or throwing. . Unlocking the rear gate on the 5-door
. Do not take the transmitter apart without a key
except when replacing the bat- . Unlocking the trunk lid on the 4-door
tery. without a key
. Do not get the transmitter wet. If it . Sounding a panic alarm
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth . Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
immediately. tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-14.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of The operable distance of the remote
Industry Canada. Operation is subject keyless entry system is approximately 30
to the following two conditions: (1) This feet (10 meters). However, this distance
device may not cause harmful inter- will vary depending on environmental
ference, and (2) this device must conditions. The system’s operable dis-
accept any interference received, in- tance will be shorter in areas near a
cluding interference that may cause facility or electronic equipment emitting
undesired operation. strong radio waves such as a power plant,
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
Changes or modifications not ex-
controller of home electronic appliances.
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the The remote keyless entry system does not
user’s authority to operate the equip- operate when the key is inserted in the
ment. ignition switch.
Two transmitters are provided for your
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-8 Keys and doors
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-9
& Opening the trunk lid/un- parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet button once.
locking rear gate (10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “ ” The horn will sound and the turn signal
button three times in a 5-second period lights will flash.
will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
once and its turn signal lights to flash three button on the remote transmitter. Unless a
times. button on the remote transmitter is
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
NOTE after approximately 30 seconds.
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “ ” button & Selecting audible signal op-
three times, the system may not re-
spond to the signals from the remote eration
transmitter. Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
& Sounding a panic alarm the audible signal off.
! 4-door models Do the following to deactivate the audible
The trunk lid opens when the “ ” button signal. You can also use the same steps
is pressed continuously for at least 2 to restore the function.
seconds. An electronic chirp will sound 1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
twice and the turn signal lights will flash doors and the rear gate.
twice. 2. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
! 5-door models of the power door locking switch.
3. While holding down the REAR (UN-
Pressing the “ ” button unlocks the rear
LOCK) side of the power door locking
gate.
switch, pull the key out and re-insert it into
An electronic chirp will sound twice and the ignition switch at least 6 times within
the turn signal lights will flash twice. 10 seconds after Step 2.
A “PANIC” button is located on the back of 4. Open and close the driver’s door once
& Vehicle finder function within 10 seconds after Step 3.
the transmitter.
Use this function to find your vehicle 5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to
parked among many vehicles in a large To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
indicate completion of the setting.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-10 Keys and doors
You may have the above settings done by To replace the battery:
your SUBARU dealer.
& Replacing the battery
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the transmitter when repla-
cing the battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the trans-
mitter when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to 1) Negative (−) side facing up
touch the battery and any re- 1. Open the transmitter case using a flat- 3. Replace with a new battery (type
moved parts; children could head screwdriver. CR2025 or equivalent) making sure to
swallow them.
install the new battery with the negative
. There is a danger of explosion if (−) side facing up.
an incorrect replacement battery 4. Refit the removed half of the transmit-
is used. Replace only with the ter case.
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery. After the battery is replaced, the trans-
. Batteries should not be exposed mitter must be synchronized with the
to excessive heat such as sun- remote keyless entry system’s control
shine, fire or the like. unit. Press either the “ ” or “ ” button
six times to synchronize the unit.
When the transmitter battery begins to get & Replacing lost transmitters
weak, transmitter range will begin to
decrease. Replace the battery as soon If you lose a transmitter or want to
as possible. 2. Remove the old battery from the purchase additional transmitters (up to
holder. four can be programmed), you should re-
program all of your transmitters for secur-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-11
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-12 Keys and doors
position to the “ON” position 10 times the switch and the next exceeds 5
within 15 seconds. seconds, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
NOTE beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
. When you complete step (2), an six times, perform the procedure again
electronic tone will sound once. starting with part 3.
. If you do not perform steps (1) and
(2) within 45 seconds, an error will
occur. Neither an electronic tone nor
the buzzer will sound, and the interior
lamp will not flash. In this event, per-
form the whole procedure again begin-
ning with part 1.
4. Open and close the door once within 5. Before the electronic tone stops
15 seconds. sounding, push the lock side of the power
door lock switch the same number of
NOTE times as the leftmost digit of the transmit-
. When part 4 of the procedure is ter code. For example, push the lock
completed, an electronic tone will switch eight times if the leftmost digit of
sound for 30 seconds. the code is 8. 6. When you have finished entering the
. If you do not perform the operations number, push the unlock side of the lock
in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error NOTE
switch within 5 seconds.
will occur and the electronic tone will . The electronic tone will stop sound-
not sound. In this event, perform the ing when you start entering the num- NOTE
registration steps again beginning with ber. . An electronic tone will sound.
part 3 of the procedure. . If you do not start entering the . If you push the unlock side of the
number using the lock switch before lock switch when more than 5 seconds
the electronic tone stops sounding, an have passed, an error will occur. In this
error will occur. In this event, perform event, perform the procedure again
the registration steps again beginning beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
with part 3 of the procedure. six times, perform the procedure again
. If the interval between one push of starting with part 3.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-13
7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure place once to indicate completion of codes should be deleted from the mem-
for each of the remaining digits of the registration, provided the code entered ory.
transmitter code beginning with the sec- the second time is identical to that entered To delete old transmitter codes, program
ond digit (counting from the left) and the first time. four transmitter codes into the system. If
finishing with the eighth digit. you have only one current transmitter,
NOTE program it four times. If you have two
NOTE If the code entered the second time is current transmitters, program each one
. When you finish entering the eighth not identical to the code entered the twice. If you have three current transmit-
digit, an electronic tone will sound for first time, an error will occur. In this ters, program two of them once and the
30 seconds. event, perform the procedure again third one twice. This process will leave
. If the interval between one push of beginning with part 5. If an error occurs only current transmitter codes in the
the switch and the next exceeds 5 five times, perform the procedure again system’s memory.
seconds, an error will occur. In this starting with part 3.
event, perform the procedure again
10. If you wish to program another trans-
NOTE
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs Make sure no one else is operating
mitter code into the system (up to four
six times, perform the procedure again their keyless entry system within range
transmitter codes can be programmed into
starting with part 3. of your vehicle when programming
the system), perform the procedure begin-
8. Before the electronic tone stops ning with part 4. When you have finished transmitters. If someone else were to
sounding, use the power door lock switch programming all of the necessary trans- operate their remote transmitter while
to reenter the transmitter code beginning mitter codes into the system, remove the you are programming your transmit-
with the leftmost digit. key from the ignition switch. ters, it is possible that their transmitter
code will be programmed into your
11. Test every registered transmitter to
NOTE confirm correct operation.
system, allowing them unauthorized
If you do not start entering the number access to your vehicle.
using the lock switch before the elec- ! Deleting old transmitter codes
tronic tone stops sounding, an error
The control unit of the remote keyless
will occur. In this event, perform the
entry system has four memory locations to
procedure again beginning with part 3.
store transmitter codes, giving it the ability
9. When you have finished entering the to operate with up to four transmitters.
code a second time, an electronic tone will When you lose a transmitter, the lost
sound for 1 second and automatic door transmitter’s code remains in the memory.
locking and unlocking operation will take For security reasons, lost transmitter
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-14 Keys and doors
Alarm system the horn will continue to sound for a 3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door (or position.
The alarm system helps to protect your the rear gate/trunk lid) is closed while the 4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn horn is sounding, the horn will stop of the driver’s power door locking switch,
sounds, dome light illuminates (only when sounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds. open the driver’s door within the following
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR” The alarm is triggered by: 1 second, and wait 10 seconds without
position) and the turn signal lights flash if releasing the switch. The setting will then
someone attempts to break into your . Opening a door, the rear gate or trunk be changed as follows:
vehicle. The starter motor is also inter- lid
rupted to prevent starting the vehicle . Physical impact to the vehicle, such as If the system was previously activated:
without a key. forced entry (only vehicles with shock The odometer/trip meter screen displays
sensors (dealer option)) “AL oF” and the horn sounds twice,
The system can be armed and disarmed indicating that the system is now deacti-
with the remote transmitter. NOTE vated.
The system does not operate when the The alarm system can be set to trigger If the system was previously deacti-
key is inserted into the ignition switch. illumination of the dome light. The vated:
dome light notification is deactivated The odometer/trip meter screen displays
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set as the factory setting. A SUBARU
for activation at the time of shipment from “AL on” and the horn sounds once,
dealer can activate the system. Contact indicating that the system is now acti-
the factory. You can set the system for your SUBARU dealer for details.
deactivation yourself or have it done by vated.
your SUBARU dealer.
& Activating and deactivating NOTE
& System operation the alarm system You may have the above setting
change done by your SUBARU dealer.
The alarm system will sound the following To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarms when triggered: alarm system for activation or deactiva-
. The vehicle’s horn will sound, dome tion, do the following.
light illuminates (only when the dome light 1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
switch is in the “DOOR” position) and the “Disarming the system” F2-16.
turn signal lights will flash for 30 seconds. 2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
. If any door (or the rear gate/trunk lid) doors (and the rear gate if your vehicle is a
remains open after the 30-second period, 5-door).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-15
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-16 Keys and doors
tically lock. once and the security indicator light will system will not switch to the surveil-
! To arm the system using power start flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing lance state.
door locking switches for 30 seconds (standby time), the indi- – Doors are unlocked using the
cator lights will then flash slowly (twice remote transmitter.
1. Close all windows. approximately every 2 seconds), indicat- – Any door (including the rear gate
2. Remove the key from the ignition ing that the system has been armed for of a 5-door or the trunk of a 4-door)
switch. surveillance. is opened.
3. Open the doors and get out of the – Ignition switch is turned to the
vehicle. NOTE “ON” position.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is . The system can be armed even if the
locked. engine hood and/or the windows are & Disarming the system
5. Close the doors (and the rear gate on opened. Always make sure that they Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than
the 5-door) but leave only the driver’s door are fully closed before arming the 2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The
or the front passenger’s door open. system. driver’s door will unlock, an electronic
. The 30-second standby time can be chirp will sound twice, the turn signal
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per- lights will flash twice. The flashing of the
formed by your SUBARU dealer. security indicator light will then change
. If your vehicle is a 4-door and you slowly (once approximately every 3 sec-
unlock the trunk using the remote onds from twice approximately every 2
transmitter’s “ ” button with the seconds), indicating that the alarm system
alarm system armed, the system will has been disarmed.
be temporarily placed in a standby
state. The system will go back to the NOTE
surveillance state upon locking the After disarming the alarm system,
trunk. briefly press the “ ” button a second
. The system is in the standby mode time within 5 seconds to unlock all
for a 30-second period after locking the other doors and the rear gate (5-door).
6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) of doors with the remote transmitter. The
! Emergency disarming
the power door locking switch to set the security indicator light will flash at
door locks. short intervals during this period. If you cannot disarm the system using the
. If any of the following actions are transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will broken or the transmitter battery is too
sound once, the turn signal lights will flash done during the standby period, the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-17
weak), you can disarm the system without & Passive arming
using the transmitter. When passive arming mode has been
The system can be disarmed as follows. programmed by the dealer, arming of the
. Turn the ignition switch from the system is automatically accomplished
“LOCK” to the “ON” position with a without using the remote transmitter. Note
registered key. that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
MANUALLY LOCKED.
& Valet mode
! To enter the passive mode
When you choose the valet mode, the
If you wish to program the passive arming
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, have it done by your SUBARU
mode, the remote transmitter is used only
dealer.
for locking and unlocking the doors and
rear gate (5-door) and panic activation. ! Arming the system 1) ON
To enter the valet mode, change the 2) LOCK
CAUTION
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for 2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to
deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating In passive mode, the system will “LOCK” position and remove the key from
and deactivating the alarm system” F2- automatically activate the alarm but the ignition switch.
14. The security indicator light will con- WILL NOT automatically lock the 3. Open the doors and get out of the
tinue to flash once every 3 seconds doors. In order to lock the doors vehicle.
indicating that the system is in the valet you must either lock them as in-
mode. dicated in step 4 below or with the
To exit valet mode, change the setting of key once they have been closed.
your vehicle’s alarm system for activation Failure to lock the doors manually
mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat- will result in a higher security risk.
ing the alarm system” F2-14.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-18 Keys and doors
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-19
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-20 Keys and doors
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-21
! Locking the passengers’ windows ! Passengers’ side switches Trunk lid (4-door)
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the trunk lid closed
while driving.
. Help prevent young children from
locking themselves in the trunk.
On hot or sunny days, the tem-
perature in the trunk could
quickly become high enough to
1) Lock 1) Open cause death or serious heat-
2) Unlock 2) Close related injuries including brain
damage to anyone locked inside,
Push the lock switch. When the lock To open: particularly for small children.
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the Push the switch down and hold it until the
passengers’ windows cannot be opened . When leaving the vehicle, either
window reaches the desired position.
or closed. close all windows and lock all
To close: doors. Also make certain that the
Push the switch again to cancel the Pull the switch up and hold it until the trunk is closed.
passengers’ window locking. window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power
window switch cluster, located on the
driver’s side door, is in the “LOCK”
position, the passengers’ windows cannot
be operated with the passengers’
switches.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-22 Keys and doors
& To open and close the trunk & To lock and unlock the trunk inside the trunk. In the event children or
lid from outside lid release lever adults become locked inside the trunk, the
handle allows them to open the lid. The
The trunk lid can be opened using the handle is located on the inside of the trunk
remote keyless entry system. Refer to lid.
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-7.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
trunk lid down until the latch engages.
NOTE
Do not leave your valuables in the
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-23
WARNING ! Inspection
Perform the following steps at least twice
Never allow any child to get in the a year to check the release handle for
trunk and play with the release correct operation.
handle. If the driver starts the vehi- 1. Open the trunk lid.
cle without knowing that a child is
inside the trunk and the child opens
the lid using the release handle, the
child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.
CAUTION
This places the latch in the locked posi-
. Do not close the lid while grip- tion.
ping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fasten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk. 2. Use a screwdriver with a thin blade.
Such use may result in damage Slide the screwdriver blade from the slit
of the handle. aperture of the lock assembly fully to the
end until you hear a click.
. Load the trunk so that cargo can
not strike the release handle. If
the cargo hits the handle while
the vehicle is being driven, the
handle may be pulled up and the
trunk lid may open. That may
cause cargo to fall out of the 3. Move the release handle, from outside
trunk, which could create a traffic the vehicle, in the direction of the arrow to
safety hazard. check if the latch is released.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-24 Keys and doors
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked firmly until the latch engages.
using either of the following systems. The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
. Power door locking switch: Refer to pull it down holding the recessed grip.
“Power door locking switches” F2-6.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
WARNING
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-7. . To prevent dangerous exhaust
To open: gas from entering the vehicle,
First unlock the rear gate lock then push always keep the rear gate closed
the rear gate opener button. while driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-25
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
2-26 Keys and doors
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Keys and doors 2-27
NOTE
. For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
. If the moonroof cannot be closed
through the switch operation because
of system failure, it can be closed
manually using a hex-head wrench.
For the procedure, refer to “Moonroof
– if moonroof cannot be closed” F9-19.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls
SPORT mode indicator light (AT vehicles) ........... 3-28 Light control switch........................................... 3-34
SI-DRIVE indicator light (WRX STI)...................... 3-29 Headlights ......................................................... 3-35
Shift-up indicator light (WRX STI)........................ 3-29 High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-35
Selector lever and gear position indicator Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-35
(AT vehicles) .................................................... 3-29 Daytime running light system............................. 3-36
Turn signal indicator lights ................................. 3-29 Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-36
High beam indicator light ................................... 3-29
Illumination brightness control......................... 3-36
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 3-29
Cruise control set indicator light......................... 3-30
Headlight beam leveler (WRX STI) ................... 3-37
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-30 Front fog light switch (if equipped) .................. 3-37
Headlight indicator light (if equipped) ................. 3-30 Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-38
Driver’s control center differential auto indicator Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-39
light (WRX STI)................................................. 3-30 Rear window wiper and washer
Driver’s control center differential indicator and switch – 5-door................................................ 3-41
warning lights (WRX STI).................................. 3-30 Rear window defogger button .......................... 3-41
REV indicator light (WRX STI) ............................. 3-31 Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped).............. 3-43
Clock ................................................................... 3-31 Mirrors ................................................................ 3-44
Information display ............................................ 3-32 Inside mirror...................................................... 3-44
Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-33 Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-45
Current fuel consumption (if equipped) ............... 3-33 Tilt steering wheel (if equipped) ....................... 3-47
Average fuel consumption .................................. 3-34 Tilt/telescopic steering wheel (if equipped) ..... 3-48
Turn off display of fuel consumption Horn .................................................................... 3-48
indicator .......................................................... 3-34
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-3
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-4 Instruments and controls
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
& START
The key can be turned from “Acc” to The engine is started in this position. The
“LOCK” only when the selector lever is in starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the “P” position. the key is released (after the engine has
! MT vehicles started), the key automatically returns to . The key grip is touching another key
the “ON” position. or a metallic key holder.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-5
contains an immobilizer transponder. Hazard warning flasher Meters and gauges (turbo
models)
. The key is near or touching another
transmitter.
NOTE
& Key reminder chime Liquid-crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges on
The reminder chime sounds when the the combination meter. You will find
driver’s door opens and the key is in the their indications hard to see if you wear
“LOCK” or “Acc” position. The chime stops polarized glasses.
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the key is removed from
the ignition switch or the driver’s door is & Combination meter illumina-
closed. tion
When the ignition switch is turned to the
& Ignition switch light The hazard warning flasher is used to “ON” position, the various parts of the
For easy access to the ignition switch in warn other drivers when you have to park combination meter are illuminated in the
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi- your vehicle under emergency conditions. following sequence:
nates when driver’s door is opened. The The hazard warning flasher works regard- 1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
light remains illuminated for 20 seconds less of the position of the ignition switch. needles and gauge needles illuminate.
and turns off after driver’s door is closed or 2. Meter needles and gauge needles
if the key is turned to the “ON” position. To turn on the hazard warning flasher, each show MAX position.
push the hazard warning button on the
3. Meter needles and gauge needles
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,
each show MIN position.
push the button again.
4. Meter and gauge dials, odometer and
NOTE trip meter back light illuminate.
When the hazard warning flasher is on, 5. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
the turn signals do not work. gins.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-6 Instruments and controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-7
*: “ ” or “ ”, and “ ” or “ ” cannot
be displayed when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. 1) Trip knob
3. To change the current setting, press This meter displays the odometer and two
the trip knob for at least 2 seconds. trip meters when the ignition switch is in
the “LOCK”, “Acc” or “ON” position.
: Activated If you press the trip knob when the ignition
: Deactivated switch is in the “LOCK” position, the
odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
NOTE possible to switch the indications while
The initial illumination setting of the the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do
2. Press the trip knob to show “ ” or
meter/gauge needles of your vehicle not press the trip knob within 10 seconds
“ ” on the odometer and trip meter
has been set for activation “ ” at the of illumination of the odometer/trip meter,
display. The display can be switched as
time of shipment from the factory. the odometer/trip meter will turn off.
shown in the following illustration by
pressing the trip knob. & Speedometer The display can be switched as shown
The speedometer shows the vehicle below by pressing the trip knob.
speed.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-8 Instruments and controls
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-9
& Tachometer even if the fuel tank contains fuel. This indicates that the fuel filler door
The tachometer shows the engine speed (lid) is located on the right side of the
The gauge may move slightly during vehicle.
in thousands of revolutions per minute. braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel
level movement in the tank. ! Low fuel warning light
CAUTION If you press the trip knob while the ignition The low fuel warning light illuminates
Do not operate the engine with the switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position, when the tank is nearly empty [approxi-
pointer of the tachometer in the red the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp
zone. This may cause severe da- amount of fuel remaining in the tank. gal)].
mage to the engine. If, while the fuel gauge is indicating the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank, you It only operates when the ignition switch is
(a) do not press the trip knob for 10 in the “ON” position.
& Fuel gauge seconds or (b) open and close the driver’s NOTE
door, the fuel gauge indication will turn off.
This light does not turn off unless the
NOTE tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US
gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-10 Instruments and controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-11
NOTE
Even if the REV alarm system is not set,
the REV indicator light will illuminates
whenever the engine speed enters the
tachometer’s red zone.
4. When the trip knob is pushed, the 7. Every time that the trip knob is pushed
hundreds place flashes. and held, the buzzer changes to activate
5. Release your finger from trip knob or deactivate.
once, then push and hold the trip knob b – on: Activated
again. The number will change sequen- b – off: Deactivated
tially from 0 to 9. Release your finger at When the mode is changed to “activate”,
the desired alarm-level engine speed. the buzzer sounds.
6. When the trip knob is pushed, the 8. Push the trip knob to complete the
buzzer sounds and the REV alarm system setting procedure.
will automatically enter its new setting
mode (step 7 below), in which you can NOTE
2. When the trip knob is pushed for more activate or deactivate the buzzer.
than 2 seconds, the thousands place . The REV alarm system does not
<Selectable engine speed range> operate while settings are being en-
flashes.
The alarm-level engine speed can be set tered.
3. Release your finger from the trip knob (in 100 rpm steps) within the range from
once, then push and hold the trip knob . The speed-setting mode terminates
2,000 rpm to 7,000 rpm. if “--00” rpm is selected.
again. The number will change sequen-
tially from 2 to 7. Release your finger at . The speed-setting mode is canceled
the desired alarm-level engine speed. if the ignition switch is turned from ON
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-12 Instruments and controls
to OFF, OFF to ON, or the vehicle starts Meters and gauges (non-tur- & Canceling the function for
moving before the setting procedure is meter/gauge needle move-
finished.
bo models)
ment upon turning on the
. Setting the speed is impossible ignition switch
when the vehicle is moving. NOTE
. The set engine speed may differ Liquid-crystal displays are used in
from the engine speed shown by the some of the meters and gauges on
tachometer. Use the engine speed the combination meter. You will find
shown by the tachometer as a rough their indications hard to see if you wear
guide. polarized glasses.
. If the setting operation is performed
with the engine switch turned off, the
REV indicator light turns off and the & Combination meter illumina-
setting operation is aborted when you tion
have stopped the setting operation for When the ignition switch is turned to the
approximately 10 seconds. “ON” position, the various parts of the
. If the setting operation is performed combination meter are illuminated in the
with the engine switch turned off, the following sequence:
REV indicator light turns off and the 1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter It is possible to activate or deactivate the
setting operation is aborted when you needles, gauge needles, odometer and movement of the meter needles and
open and close the driver’s door. trip meter back light illuminate. gauge needles that takes place when the
2. Meter needles and gauge needles ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
& Deactivating the REV alarm each show MAX position. position.
system 3. Meter needles and gauge needles Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” or
To deactivate the REV indicator light and each show MIN position. “Acc” position.
buzzer functions of the REV alarm system, 4. Regular illumination (for driving) be- Press the trip knob to show “ ” or “ ”
set the thousands place of the alarm-level gins. on the odometer and trip meter display.
engine speed to “–”. The display can be switched as shown in
the following illustration by pressing the
trip knob.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-13
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-14 Instruments and controls
! Odometer vehicle has been driven since you last set & Tachometer
it to zero. The tachometer shows the engine speed
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A in thousands of revolutions per minute.
trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob
and keep the knob pushed for more than 2 CAUTION
seconds.
Do not operate the engine with the
CAUTION pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. This may cause severe da-
To ensure safety, do not attempt to mage to the engine.
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result. NOTE
To protect the engine while the selector
lever is in the “P” or “N” position (for
The odometer shows the total distance NOTE AT models) or the shift lever is in the
that the vehicle has been driven. If the connection between the combina- neutral position (for MT vehicles), the
! Double trip meter tion meter and battery is broken for any engine is controlled so that the engine
reason such as vehicle maintenance or speed may not become too high even if
fuse replacement, the data recorded on the accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
the trip meter will be lost.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-15
& Fuel gauge door, the fuel gauge indication will turn off. NOTE
This light does not turn off unless the
NOTE tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US
gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-16 Instruments and controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-17
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-18 Instruments and controls
. Do not install any accessory such as a moving the seat back and forth. increase the risk of injury.
table or TV onto the seatback. . Flashing or flickering of the warn-
. Do not store a heavy load in the If still the seatbelt warning device for front
passenger’s seat does not function cor- ing light
seatback pocket.
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac- . No illumination of the warning
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to tions described above, immediately con- light when the ignition switch is
place his/her hands or legs on the front tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec- first turned to the “ON” position
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to tion.
pull the seatback. . Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Do not use front seats with their back- & SRS airbag system
ward-forward position and seatback not . Illumination of the warning light
warning light while driving
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them When the ignition switch is turned to the
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to “ON” position, the SRS airbag system
“Front seats” F1-2. warning light will illuminate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds and turn off. This shows
If the seatbelt warning device for the front that the SRS airbag, SRS side airbag,
passenger’s seat does not function cor- SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt preten-
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the sioners are operating normally.
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passen- WARNING
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions. If the warning light exhibits any of
. Ensure that no article is placed on the the following conditions, there may
seat other than a child restraint system be a malfunction in the seatbelt
and its child occupant, although we pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
strongly recommend that all children sit system. Immediately take your vehi-
in the rear seat properly restrained. cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
. Ensure that there is no article left in the to have the system checked. Unless
seatback pocket. checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
airbag will not operate properly in
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
the event of a collision, which may
seat are locked into place securely by
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-19
& Front passenger’s frontal indicators illuminates depending on the & CHECK ENGINE warn-
airbag ON and OFF indica- status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal ing light/Malfunction in-
tors airbag determined by the SUBARU ad- dicator lamp
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag CAUTION
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-
indicator will remain off. nates while you are driving, have
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag your vehicle checked/repaired by
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal your SUBARU dealer as soon as
airbag ON indicator will remain off while possible. Continued vehicle opera-
the OFF indicator will illuminate. tion without having the emission
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON” control system checked and re-
position, if both the ON and OFF indica- paired as necessary could cause
tors remain illuminated or off simulta- serious damage, which may not be
neously even after the system check covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON period, the system is malfunctioning.
indicator Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi- If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF ately for an inspection. while the engine is running, it may indicate
indicator that there is a problem or potential
problem somewhere in the emission con-
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON trol system.
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag. ! If the light illuminates steadily
The indicators are located next to the If the light illuminates steadily while driving
clock in the center portion of the dash- or does not turn off after the engine starts,
board. an emission control system malfunction
When the ignition switch is turned to the has been detected.
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF You should have your vehicle checked by
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
which time the system is checked. Follow- ately.
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-20 Instruments and controls
NOTE The CHECK ENGINE warning light may “Engine overheating” F9-13.
This light also illuminates when the fuel stop blinking and illuminate steadily after
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks. several driving trips. You should have your This coolant temperature low indicator
vehicle checked by an authorized light/coolant temperature high warning
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
SUBARU dealer immediately. light has the following two functions:
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator lamp illuminat- . Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-
ing could be a loose or missing fuel filler
& Coolant temperature cient warming up of the engine
cap. Remove the cap and retighten it until low indicator light (non- . Illumination in RED indicates overheat-
it clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering turbo models)/Coolant ing condition of the engine
with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the temperature high warn-
cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE ing light (non-turbo For the system check, this indicator light/
warning light illuminates in red for approxi-
warning light turn off immediately. It may models) mately 2 seconds when the ignition switch
take several driving trips. If the light does
not turn off, take your vehicle to your CAUTION is turned to the “ON” position.
authorized SUBARU dealer immediately. After that, if the coolant temperature is
. After turning the ignition switch
! If the light is blinking to the “ON” position, if this
low, this indicator light/warning light
If the light is blinking while driving, an changes to blue and maintains illumina-
indicator light/warning light re- tion in blue. This blue illuminated light
engine misfire condition has been de- mains illuminated in RED for
tected which may damage the emission turns off when the engine is sufficiently
approximately more than 2 sec- warmed up.
control system. onds, the electrical system may
To prevent serious damage to the emis- be malfunctioning. Immediately If the engine is overheated, this indicator
sion control system, you should do the contact your SUBARU dealer for light/warning light illuminates in red im-
following. an inspection. mediately. At this time, safely stop the
. Reduce vehicle speed. . If this indicator light/warning light vehicle as soon as possible, and refer to
. Avoid hard acceleration. illuminates in RED while driving, the emergency steps for the case of
. Avoid steep uphill grades. safely stop the vehicle as soon engine overheating. Refer to “Engine
as possible, and refer to the overheating” F9-13. After that, have the
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi- system checked by your nearest
ble. emergency steps for the case of
engine overheating. After that, SUBARU dealer.
have the system checked by your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Refer to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-21
NOTE check the engine oil level. If the oil level is the automatic transmission control system
If the engine is restarted after a certain low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is is not working properly. Contact your
driving condition, this indicator light/ at the proper level but the light remains nearest SUBARU dealer for service im-
warning light may illuminate in red. illuminated, contact your nearest mediately.
However, this is not a malfunction if the SUBARU dealer immediately.
indicator light/warning light turns off & Rear differential oil
after a short time. CAUTION temperature warning
Do not operate the engine with the light (WRX STI)
& Charge warning light oil pressure warning light illumi-
nated. This may cause serious en-
CAUTION
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging gine damage. Reduce vehicle speed and park the
system is not working properly. vehicle in a safe place as soon as
possible if the R.DIFF TEMP light
If the light illuminates while driving or does & AT OIL TEMP warning illuminates. Continued driving with
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the light (AT vehicles) this light illuminated can damage
engine at the first safe opportunity and the rear differential and other parts
check the alternator belt. If the belt is The AT oil temperature warning light “AT
OIL TEMP” illuminates when the ignition of the powertrain.
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains illuminated, switch is turned to the “ON” position and
turns off after the engine has started. The Rear differential oil temperature warn-
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer ing light illuminates when the ignition
immediately. If this light illuminates when the engine is
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
running, it may indicate that the automatic
turns off after the engine has started.
& Oil pressure warning transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
light If the light illuminates while driving, im- running, it may indicate that the rear
If this light illuminates when the engine is mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place differential oil temperature is too hot.
running, it may indicate that the engine oil and let the engine idle until the warning At this time, the driver’s control center
pressure is low and the lubricating system light turns off. differential will automatically cancel the
is not working properly. ! Automatic transmission control current torque-distribution ratio setting and
If the light illuminates while driving or does system warning adopt its minimum ratio.
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes If the light illuminates while driving, reduce
engine at the first safe opportunity and after the engine starts, it may indicate that vehicle speed and stop the vehicle at the
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-22 Instruments and controls
nearest safe place. Park the vehicle for should be checked monthly when cold a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
several minutes. After the light turns off, and inflated to the inflation pressure when the system is not operating properly.
you can start driving. recommended by the vehicle manufac- The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
If the light does not turn off, contact the turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
nearest SUBARU dealer for service. pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of When the system detects a malfunction,
a different size than the size indicated on the telltale will flash for approximately one
NOTE the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- minute and then remain continuously
. If the tire pressures are not correct sure label, you should determine the illuminated. This sequence will continue
and/or the tires are not all the same proper inflation pressure for those tires.) upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
size and brand, the rear differential will as the malfunction exists. When the
As an added safety feature, your vehicle malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
be heavily loaded when the vehicle is
has been equipped with a tire pressure system may not be able to detect or signal
driven, resulting in an abnormally high
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
oil temperature.
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
. The rear differential oil will deterio- malfunctions may occur for a variety of
more of your tires is significantly under- reasons, including the installation of re-
rate if its temperature increases en-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire placement or alternate tires or wheels on
ough for the rear differential oil tem-
pressure telltale illuminates, you should the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
perature warning light to illuminate. It is
stop and check your tires as soon as functioning properly. Always check the
advisable to have the rear differential
possible, and inflate them to the proper TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
oil replaced as soon as possible.
pressure. Driving on a significantly under- one or more tires or wheels on your
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
& Low tire pressure can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
warning light (U.S.-spec. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, to continue to function properly.
models) and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
Should the warning light illuminate stea-
stopping ability.
When the ignition switch is turned to the dily after blinking for approximately one
Please note that the TPMS is not a
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn- minute, have the system inspected by
substitute for proper tire maintenance, your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
and it is the driver’s responsibility to possible.
seconds to check that the tire pressure
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
under-inflation has not reached the level WARNING
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
are properly inflated, the light will turn off.
pressure telltale. If this light does not illuminate
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
Your vehicle has also been equipped with briefly after the ignition switch is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-23
turned ON or the light illuminates or system resetting. If the light & ABS warning light
steadily after blinking for approxi- illuminates steadily after blinking
mately one minute, you should have for approximately one minute, The ABS warning light illuminates when
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- promptly contact a SUBARU dealer the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as to have the system inspected. position and turns off after approximately 2
soon as possible. seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system
If this light illuminates while driving,
CAUTION is working properly.
never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu- The tire pressure monitoring system CAUTION
ally reducing speed. Then slowly is NOT a substitute for manually
pull off the road to a safe place. checking tire pressure. The tire If the warning light behaves as
Otherwise an accident involving pressure should be checked peri- follows, the ABS system may not
serious vehicle damage and serious odically (at least monthly) using a work properly.
personal injury could occur. tire gauge. After any change to tire When the warning light is on, the
If this light still illuminates while pressure(s), the tire pressure mon- ABS function shuts down; however,
driving after adjusting the tire pres- itoring system will not re-check tire the conventional brake system con-
sure, a tire may have significant inflation pressures until the vehicle tinues to operate normally.
damage and a fast leak that causes is first driven more than 20 mph (32 . The warning light does not illu-
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have km/h). After adjusting the tire pres- minate when the ignition switch
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire sures, increase the vehicle speed to is turned to the “ON” position.
as soon as possible. at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla- . The warning light illuminates
When a spare tire is mounted or a
tion pressures. If the tire pressures when the ignition switch is
wheel rim is replaced without the
are now above the severe low turned to the “ON” position, but
original pressure sensor/transmitter
pressure threshold, the low tire it does not turn off even when the
being transferred, the Low tire pres-
pressure warning light should turn vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
sure warning light will illuminates
off a few minutes later. Therefore, be mately 8 mph (12 km/h).
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates sure to install the specified size for . The warning light illuminates dur-
the TPMS is unable to monitor all the front and rear tires. ing driving.
four road wheels. Contact your If any of these conditions occur,
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible have the ABS system repaired at
for tire and sensor replacement and/ the first available opportunity by
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-24 Instruments and controls
your SUBARU dealer. & Brake system If the brake system warning light should
warning light illuminate while driving (with the parking
With a vehicle equipped with an EBD brake fully released and with the ignition
system, the ABS warning light illuminates WARNING switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
together with the brake system warning indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
light if the EBD system malfunctions. For . Driving with the brake system brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
further details of the EBD system mal- warning light on is dangerous. stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
function warning, refer to “Brake system This indicates your brake system and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
warning light” F3-24. may not be working properly. If level is below the “MIN” mark in the
the light remains illuminated, reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
NOTE have the brakes inspected by a the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
If the warning light behavior is as SUBARU dealer immediately. dealer for repair.
described in the following, the ABS . If at all in doubt about whether ! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
system may be considered normal. the brakes are operating prop- (EBD) system warning
. The warning light illuminates right erly, do not drive the vehicle. The brake system warning light also
after the engine is started but turns off Have your vehicle towed to the illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
immediately, remaining off. nearest SUBARU dealer for re- EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
. The warning light remains illumi- pair. together with the ABS warning light.
nated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off when the vehicle speed The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
This light has the following three functions:
reaches approximately 8 mph (12 the brake system warning light and ABS
km/h). ! Parking brake warning warning light illuminate simultaneously
. The warning light illuminates during The light illuminates with the parking during driving.
driving, but it turns off immediately and brake applied while the ignition switch is Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
remains off. in the “ON” position. It turns off when the tional braking system will still function.
parking brake is fully released. However, the rear wheels will be more
When driving with an insufficient battery prone to locking when the brakes are
voltage such as when the engine is jump ! Brake fluid level warning
applied harder than usual and the vehi-
started, the ABS warning light may illumi- This light illuminates when the brake fluid cle’s motion may therefore become some-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage level has dropped to near the “MIN” level what harder to control.
and does not indicate a malfunction. of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition If the brake system warning light and ABS
When the battery becomes fully charged, switch in the “ON” position and with the warning light illuminate simultaneously,
the light will turn off. parking brake fully released.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-25
take the following steps: when the tank is nearly empty approxi- light illuminates. After the engine starts it
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, or 2.2 Imp will turn off. While the engine is rotating, if
flat place. gal). It only operates when the ignition there are any malfunctions, the light will
2. Shut down the engine, apply the switch is in the “ON” position. When this illuminate.
parking brake and then restart it. light illuminates, fill the fuel tank immedi-
ately. WARNING
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system NOTE When the Hill start assist warning
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to light illuminates, have the vehicle
This light does not turn off unless the
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the inspected at an authorized SUBARU
tank is replenished up to an internal
system inspected. dealer.
fuel quantity of approximately 3.7 US
4. If both warning lights illuminate again gal (14 liters, 3.1 Imp gal).
and remain illuminated after the engine
! Hill start assist OFF indicator light
has been restarted, shut down the engine
CAUTION (WRX STI)
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level. While the Hill start assist system is
Promptly put fuel in the tank when- deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the ever the low fuel warning light
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be indicator light illuminates continuously to
illuminates. Engine misfires as a inform the driver that the Hill start assist
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the result of an empty tank could cause
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the system is not operational.
damage to the engine.
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
& Door open warning
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. & Hill start assist warning light
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the light (MT vehicles – if When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. equipped)/Hill start as- position, the door open warning light
sist OFF indicator light illuminates for approximately 2 seconds
& Low fuel warning light (WRX STI) and then turns off.
The low fuel warning light illuminates The door open warning light illuminates if
when the ignition switch is turned to the any door or the rear gate is not fully
! Hill start assist warning light closed.
“ON” position and turns off after approxi-
mately 2 seconds. When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the Hill start assist warning Always make sure this light is not illumi-
The low fuel warning light also illuminates nated before you start to drive.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-26 Instruments and controls
& All-Wheel Drive warn- & Vehicle Dynamics & Vehicle Dynamics
ing light (AT vehicles) Control operation indi- Control warning light (if
The All-Wheel Drive warning light illumi- cator light (if equipped) equipped)/Vehicle Dy-
nates when the ignition switch is turned to This light illuminates when the ignition namics Control OFF in-
the “ON” position and turns off after the switch is turned to the “ON” position and dicator light (if
engine has started. turns off approximately 2 seconds later. equipped)/Traction Con-
This light illuminates when All-Wheel It blinks when the skid suppression func- trol OFF indicator light
Drive is disengaged and the drive me- tion is activated. It illuminates only when (WRX STI)
chanism is switched to Front Wheel Drive the traction control function is operating. This warning light has both the function of
for maintenance or similar purposes. The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is indicating malfunctions in the Vehicle
It flashes if the vehicle is driven with tires probably malfunctioning under any of the Dynamics Control system and the function
of differing diameters fitted on the wheels following conditions. Have your vehicle of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics
or with an excessively low air pressure in checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- Control system has been deactivated or
any of the tires. ately. only the Traction Control system has been
. The light does not illuminate when the deactivated.
CAUTION ignition switch is turned to the “ON” It illuminates in the event of a malfunction
Continuing to drive with the AWD position. in the system and is on when the Vehicle
warning light flashing can damage . The light does not turn off even after a Dynamics Control system is not operating
the powertrain. If the AWD warning period of approximately 2 seconds after or only the Traction Control system is not
light starts to flash, promptly park in the ignition switch has been turned to the operating.
a safe place and check whether the “ON” position.
Except WRX STI
tires have differing diameters and This warning light illuminates when the
whether any of the tires has an ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
excessively low inflation pressure. position and turns off several seconds
after engine startup. It indicates that the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system is oper-
ating normally.
WRX STI
This warning light illuminates in yellow for
approximately 1 second when the ignition
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-27
switch is turned to the “ON” position. After Accordingly, if the ABS is inoperative, the ! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in-
that, this warning light changes to green Vehicle Dynamics Control system be- dicator light (yellow)
and remains illuminated in green for 1 comes unable to provide ABS control. As . This light illuminates when the Vehicle
second, and then turns off. It indicates that a result, the Vehicle Dynamics Control Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is system also becomes inoperative, caus- (except WRX STI).
operating normally. ing the warning light to illuminate. Though
. This light illuminates when the Vehicle
both the Vehicle Dynamics Control and
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning Dynamics Control mode switch is pressed
ABS systems are inoperative in this case,
light (yellow) for more than 2 seconds (WRX STI).
the ordinary functions of the brake system
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is are still available. You will be safe while . The light illuminates when the Vehicle
probably inoperative under any of the driving with this condition, but have your Dynamics Control system is deactivated.
following conditions. Have your vehicle vehicle checked at a SUBARU dealer as
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi- NOTE
soon as possible.
ately. . The light may remain illuminated for
. The warning light does not illuminate NOTE a while after the engine has been
when the ignition switch is turned to the If the warning light behavior is as started, especially in cold weather. This
“ON” position. described below, the Vehicle Dynamics does not indicate the existence of a
. The warning light illuminates while the Control system may be considered problem. The light should turn off as
vehicle is running. normal. soon as the engine has warmed up.
. The warning light illuminates right . The indicator light illuminates when
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle the engine has developed a problem
Dynamics Control system itself malfunc- after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off. and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
tions, the warning light only illuminates. At malfunction indicator lamp is on.
this time, the ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys- . The warning light illuminates after
tem) remains fully operational. engine startup and turns off while the The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
. The warning light illuminates when the vehicle is subsequently being driven. probably malfunctioning under the follow-
electronic control system of the ABS/ . The warning light illuminates during ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
Vehicle Dynamics Control system mal- driving, but it turns off immediately and at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
functions. remains off. . The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system has warmed up) after the engine has
provides its ABS control through the started.
electrical circuit of the ABS system.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-28 Instruments and controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-29
& SI-DRIVE indicator light timing for fuel-efficient driving. & Turn signal indicator
(WRX STI) lights
& Selector lever and gear posi-
tion indicator (AT vehicles) These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-48.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-30 Instruments and controls
“LOCK” position, and then turn it again to & Driver’s control center differ- F7-19.
the “ON” position. ential auto indicator light ! Driver’s control center dif-
(WRX STI) ferential auto [−] indicator
& Cruise control set in- light
dicator light
When the AUTO [−] mode is set, the
The cruise control set indicator light AUTO [−] indicator light illuminates.
illuminates when the ignition switch is For details, refer to “Driver’s Control
turned to the “ON” position and turns off Center Differential (DCCD) (WRX STI)”
after approximately 3 seconds. F7-19.
This light illuminates when vehicle speed
has been set. & Driver’s control center differ-
ential indicator and warning
& Front fog light indicator lights (WRX STI)
light (if equipped)
! Indicator lights
This indicator light illuminates while the
front fog lights are illuminated. This light functions while the ignition
switch is “ON”. When illuminated, it
& Headlight indicator indicates that the driver’s control center
light (if equipped) differential is set to the auto mode. It turns
This indicator light illuminates when the off when the driver’s control center differ-
headlight switch is placed in the “ ” or ential is set to the manual mode. For
“ ” position. details, refer to “Driver’s Control Center
Differential (DCCD) (WRX STI)” F7-19.
! Driver’s control center dif-
ferential auto [+] indicator
light
When the AUTO [+] mode is set, the
AUTO [+] indicator light illuminates. When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, all the indicator lights
For details, refer to “Driver’s Control illuminate for 2 seconds, and then turn off.
Center Differential (DCCD) (WRX STI)”
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-31
When you select the manual mode of the & REV indicator light Clock
driver’s control center differential, the (WRX STI)
initial limited slip differential (LSD) torque
that is currently selected for the center When the ignition switch is turned to the
differential is indicated by the illumination “ON” position, the indicator light illumi-
of these indicator lights. nates for 2 seconds, and then turns off.
! Warning light This light illuminates when the engine
speed reaches a level set by driver or
when the tachometer needle enters the
red zone.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-32 Instruments and controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-33
& Outside temperature indica- ! Road surface freeze warning indi- “ON” position, the indication does not
tor cation flash.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-34 Instruments and controls
& Average fuel consumption seconds. Then, the information display Light control switch
and the clock display will blink for 3
seconds to notify that the display of the The light control switch operates when the
fuel consumption has been turned off. key is inserted into the ignition switch.
To restore the indicator, once again press Regardless of the position of the light
the “+” button for approximately 5 sec- control switch, the illuminated lights are
onds. turned off when the key is removed from
NOTE the ignition switch.
. The indicated values vary in accor- NOTE
dance with changes in the vehicle’s Even if the key is removed from the
running conditions. Also, the indicated ignition switch, the lights can be illu-
values may differ slightly from the minated by operating the light control
actual values and should thus be switch from “OFF” to the “ ” or “ ”
treated only as a guide. position. In this case, if the driver’s
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models . When either trip meter indication is door is opened, a chirp sound will
reset, the average fuel consumption inform the driver that the lights are
This indication shows the average rate of corresponding to that trip meter indica- illuminated.
fuel consumption since the trip meter was tion is not shown until the vehicle has
last reset. subsequently covered a distance of 1
When either of the trip meter indications is mile (or 1 km). CAUTION
reset, the corresponding average fuel . The average fuel consumption is . Use of any lights for a long period
consumption value is also reset. calculated even while the indicator is of time while the engine is not
not displayed. running can cause the battery to
& Turn off display of fuel con- . Even if you turn off the fuel con- discharge.
sumption indicator sumption indicator, the fuel consump-
tion indicator will automatically turn on . Before leaving the vehicle, make
The display of the fuel consumption when the battery voltage is discon- sure that the light control switch
indicator can be turned off. nected and then reconnected for bat- is turned to the “OFF” position. If
To turn off the display of the indicator, turn tery replacement or fuse replacement. the vehicle is left unattended for
the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position a long time with the light control
and press the “+” button adjacent to the switch set to a position other
information display for approximately 5 than “OFF”, the battery may be
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-35
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-36 Instruments and controls
& Daytime running light system Turn signal lever Illumination brightness con-
trol
WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “ ” position when it
is dark outside.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-37
NOTE Headlight beam leveler Front fog light switch (if
When the control dial is turned fully (WRX STI) equipped)
upward, the illumination brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
The WRX STI version has High-Intensity The front fog lights operate only when the
Discharge (HID) headlights on the low light switch is in the “ ” position.
beam setting. The HID headlights gener- However, the front fog lights turn off when
ate more light than conventional halogen the headlights are switched to high beam.
headlights. Therefore a driver of an To turn on the front fog lights, turn the front
oncoming vehicle may experience too fog light switch on the turn signal lever
much glare when your headlight beam upward to the “ ” position. To turn off the
height adjustment is high due to the front fog lights, turn the switch back down
vehicle carrying a heavy load. to the “OFF” position.
The headlight beam leveler can be used
to adjust beam height to avoid such a
condition.
The higher the number the knob is turned
to, the lower the beam becomes.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-38 Instruments and controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-39
Refer to “Windshield washer road film. Keep the washer button & Windshield wiper and washer
fluid” F11-40. depressed at least for 1 second so that switches
Also, when driving the vehicle washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window. The wiper operates only when the ignition
when there are freezing tempera-
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate- switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” position.
tures, use non-freezing type wi-
per blades. rial on the windshield or the wiper ! Windshield wipers
blade results in jerky wiper operation
. Do not clean the wiper blades and streaking on the glass. If you
with gasoline or a solvent, such cannot remove those streaks after
as paint thinner or benzine. This operating the washer or if the wiper
will cause deterioration of the operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
wiper blades. face of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
NOTE soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
. The wiper operates only when the rinse the window glass and wiper
ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” blades with clean water. The glass is
position. clean if no beads form on the glass
. The front wiper motor is protected when you rinse with water.
against overloads by a circuit breaker. . If you cannot eliminate the streaking
If the motor operates continuously OFF: Off
even after following this procedure, : Intermittent
under an unusually heavy load, the replace the wiper blades with new
circuit breaker may trip to stop the LO: Low speed
ones. For replacement instructions, HI: High speed
motor temporarily. If this happens, park refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the F11-41. To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
wiper switch, and wait for approxi- control lever down.
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
will reset itself, and the wipers will the “OFF” position.
again operate normally.
. Clean your wiper blades and win-
dow glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-40 Instruments and controls
When the wiper switch is in the “ ” For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the To wash the windshield, push the washer
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat- lever toward you. The wipers operate until button at the end of the wiper control lever.
ing interval of the wiper. you release the lever. The washer fluid sprays until you release
The operating interval can be adjusted in the washer button. The wipers operate
nine steps. while you push the button.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-41
& Rear window wiper and speed is high). Rear window defogger but-
washer switch – 5-door When you subsequently move the selec- ton
tor lever to the “R” position (AT vehicles)
or the shift lever to the reverse position
(MT vehicles), the rear wiper will switch to
continuous operation. When you move the
selector lever/shift lever from the “R”/
reverse position to some other position,
the rear wiper will return to intermittent
operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob clockwise
to the “ ” position. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the knob.
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
To wash the rear window when the rear
ON: Normal Manual climate control system
wiper is not in use, turn the knob counter-
INT: Intermittent
OFF: Off
clockwise to the “ ” position. The washer
: Washer fluid sprays, and 2 seconds later the rear
wiper operates. Releasing the knob stops
! Rear wiper the washer fluid spray, and 3 seconds
later the rear wiper stops.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on
the end of the wiper control lever upward
to the “INT” or “ON” position.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on
the end of the lever to the “OFF” position.
With the switch turned to the “INT”
position, the rear wiper will operate inter-
mittently at intervals corresponding to the
vehicle speed (longer when the vehicle Automatic climate control system
speed is low, shorter when the vehicle
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-42 Instruments and controls
The rear window defogger operates only following. window defogger is operating.
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” . If the battery voltage drops below the . Turn on the rear window defogger if
position. permissible level within 15 minutes of the wiper is frozen to the glass.
The rear window defogger button is depression of the button, continuous
located on the climate control panel. operation is canceled and the rear window
To turn on the defogger, push the button. defogger stops operating 15 minutes later.
To turn it off, push the button again. . If the battery voltage drops below the
The indicator light located on the button permissible level after the rear window
lights up while the rear window defogger is defogger has, following depression of the
operating. button, operated for 15 minutes, stopped
operating for 2 minutes, and started
The defogger will automatically shut off operating again, the rear window defogger
after approximately 15 minutes. If the immediately stops operating.
window clears before that time, push the
button to turn it off. It also turns off when CAUTION
the ignition switch is turned to the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position. If defrosting or defogging . Do not use sharp instruments or
is desired when you restart your vehicle, window cleaner containing abra-
you have to push the button to turn it on sives to clean the inner surface
again. of the rear window. They may
Your SUBARU dealer can set your rear damage the conductors printed
window defogger for continuous opera- on the window.
tion. Contact your SUBARU dealer for . To prevent the battery from being
details. discharged, do not operate the
defogger continuously for any
Once the rear window defogger has been longer than necessary.
set for continuous operation, the rear
window defogger repeatedly operates for
15 minutes, stops for 2 minutes, and again NOTE
operates for 15 minutes. If the battery . If your vehicle is equipped with the
voltage drops below the permissible level, outside mirror defogger, the outside
continuous operation is canceled and mirror defogger operates while the rear
operation stops as described in the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-43
Windshield wiper deicer (if when the ignition switch is in the “ON” . The outside temperature becomes
position. The windshield wiper deicer is 418F (58C) or higher.
equipped) activated by pushing the same button . The vehicle speed remains at 9 mph
used for the rear window defogger. (15 km/h) or lower for 15 minutes.
Before turning on the windshield wiper . The battery voltage decreases below
deicer, remove any snow from the wind- the permissible level.
shield. To turn on the windshield wiper
deicer, push the button. The indicator light CAUTION
located on the button lights up while the To prevent the battery from being
windshield wiper deicer is operating. discharged, do not operate the
The windshield wiper deicer will automa- windshield wiper deicer continu-
tically shut off after approximately 15 ously for any longer than necessary.
minutes. If the windshield wiper blades
have been deiced completely before that
time, push the button to turn it off. It also
NOTE
Manual climate control system turns off when the ignition switch is turned If your vehicle is equipped with the
to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position. If deicing outside mirror defogger, the outside
is not complete when you restart your mirror defogger operates while the
vehicle, you have to push the button to windshield wiper deicer is operating.
turn the deicer on again.
Your SUBARU dealer can set your wind-
shield wiper deicer for continuous opera-
tion. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
details.
Once the windshield wiper deicer has
been set for continuous operation, press-
ing the button results in continuous opera-
tion. The windshield wiper deicer auto-
matically stops operating if any one of the
Automatic climate control system
following conditions occurs during contin-
The windshield wiper deicer operates only uous operation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-44 Instruments and controls
1) Left button
2) Auto dimming indicator
3) Photosensor
4) Right button
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
The inside mirror has a day and night feature which automatically reduces glare
position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the coming from headlights of vehicles behind
mirror toward you for the night position. you. It also contains a built-in compass.
Push it away for the day position. The . By pressing and releasing the left The mirror has a photosensor attached on
night position reduces glare from head- button, the automatic dimming function is both the front and back sides. If the glare
lights. toggled on or off. When the automatic from the headlights of vehicles behind you
dimming function is on, the auto dimming strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it
indicator light (green) located to the right and make the reflection surface of the
of the button will illuminate. mirror dimmer to help prevent you from
. By pressing and releasing the right being blinded. For this reason, use care
button, the compass display is toggled on not to cover the sensors with stickers, or
other similar items. Periodically wipe the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-45
sensors clean using a piece of dry soft ! Compass zone adjustment exit the zone setting mode.
cotton cloth or an applicator.
! Compass calibration & Outside mirrors
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all
nonessential electrical accessories (rear
window defogger, heater/air conditioning
system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all
doors are shut.
2. Drive to an open, level area away from
large metallic objects or structures and
make certain the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
3. Press and hold the left button for 3
seconds then release, and the compass Compass calibration zones
will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and
direction will be displayed. 1. The zone setting is factory preset to
Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration ! Convex mirror (passenger side)
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL”
zone” map shown above or one attached
disappears from the display (approxi-
to the end of this manual to verify that the WARNING
mately two or three circles). The compass
compass zone setting is correct for your
is now calibrated.
geographical location. Objects look smaller in a convex
5. Further calibration may be necessary mirror and farther away than when
2. Press and hold the right button for 3
should outside influences cause the mirror viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
seconds then release, and the word
to read inaccurately. You will know that
“ZONE” will briefly appear and then the the convex mirror to judge the
this has occurred if your compass begins distance of vehicles behind you
zone number will be displayed.
to read in only limited directions. Should when changing lanes. Use the inside
you encounter this situation, return to step 3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly
to cycle the display through all possible mirror (or glance backwards) to
one of the above procedure and recali- determine the actual size and dis-
brate the mirror. zone settings. Stop cycling when the
correct zone setting for your location is tance of objects that you view in
displayed. convex mirror.
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-46 Instruments and controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Instruments and controls 3-47
NOTE Tilt steering wheel (if “Front seats” F1-2.
While the outside mirror defogger is equipped) 2. Pull the tilt lock lever down.
operating, the rear window defogger 3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
also operates. level.
WARNING 4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
CAUTION wheel in place.
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
To prevent the battery from being tilt position while driving. This
securely locked by moving it up and down.
discharged, do not operate the de- may cause loss of vehicle control
fogger continuously for any longer and result in personal injury.
than necessary. . If the lever cannot be raised to
the fixed position, adjust the
steering wheel again. It is dan-
gerous to drive without locking
the steering wheel. This may
cause loss of vehicle control
and result in personal injury.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3-48 Instruments and controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-2 Climate control
Ventilator
& Air flow selection
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control 4-3
& Center and side ventilators ! Side ventilators Manual climate control sys-
! Center ventilators tem (if equipped)
& Control panel
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab up and down or right and left 3) Thumb-wheel
to adjust the flow direction.
Move the tab up and down or right and left 1) Temperature control dial
to adjust the flow direction. 2) Fan speed control dial
To open or close the ventilator, turn the 3) Air flow control dial
thumb-wheel up or down. 4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Rear window defogger button” F3-41.)
5) Air conditioner button
6) Air inlet selection button
! Temperature control dial
This dial regulates the temperature of air
flow from the air outlets over a range from
the blue side (cool) to red side (warm).
! Fan speed control dial
The fan operates only when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. The
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-4 Climate control
fan speed control dial is used to select the air inlet selection button. ! Air inlet selection button
four fan speeds. Also, you cannot stop the air condi-
! Air flow control dial tioner compressor by pressing the air
conditioner button.
This dial has the following five positions:
: Air flows through the instrument panel ! Air conditioner button
outlets.
: Air flows through the instrument panel
outlets and the foot outlets.
: Air flows through the foot outlets and
some through the windshield defroster
outlets.
: Air flows through the windshield
defroster outlets and foot outlets. ON position (Recirculation): Interior air
is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the
: Air flows through the windshield air inlet selection button to the ON posi-
defroster outlets. tion. The indicator light will illuminate.
Place the air inlet selection button to the
NOTE The air conditioner operates only when ON position for fast cooling with the air
When the dial is placed in the “ ” or the engine is running. conditioner or when driving on a dusty
“ ” position, the air conditioner com- road.
Push the air conditioner button while the
pressor operates automatically regard-
fan is in operation to turn on the air OFF position (Outside air): Outside air is
less of the position of the air condi- conditioner. The indicator light will illumi-
tioner button to defog the windshield drawn into the passenger compartment.
nate. Push the air inlet selection button again to
quickly. However the indicator on the
air conditioner button will not illumi- Push it again to turn off the air conditioner. the OFF position. The indicator light will
nate. At the same time, the air inlet turn off.
selection is automatically set to “out- Place the air inlet selection button to the
side air” mode. OFF position when the interior has cooled
In this state, you cannot select “recir- to a comfortable temperature and the road
culation” mode by manually pressing is no longer dusty.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control 4-5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-6 Climate control
To direct warm air toward the floor: This setting allows you to direct air of
1. Set the air inlet selection button to the different temperatures from the instrument To force outside air through the instrument
OFF position. panel and foot outlets. The air from the panel outlets:
2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” foot outlets is slightly warmer than from 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the
position. the instrument panel outlets. OFF position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
most comfortable level. OFF position. position.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ” 3. Set the temperature control dial all the
desired speed. position. way left.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the 4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
desired temperature level. desired speed.
4. Set the fan speed control dial to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control 4-7
When driving on a dusty road, set the air through the instrument panel outlets: red side.
inlet selection button to the “ON” position. 1. Set the air inlet selection button to the 3. Set the fan speed control dial at the
OFF position. highest speed.
WARNING 2. Set the air flow control dial to the “ ”
The air conditioner compressor automati-
Continued operation with the air position.
cally operates when the air flow control
inlet selection button in the ON 3. Set the air conditioner button to the dial set in the “ ” or “ ” position to
position may fog up the windows. “ON” position. provide better defogging performance.
Switch to the OFF position as soon 4. Set the temperature control dial to the
as the outside dusty condition blue side.
clears. 5. Set the fan speed control dial at the
highest speed.
& Air conditioner operation ! Defrosting or defogging
! Cooling or dehumidifying
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-8 Climate control
Automatic climate control sor automatically and the “A/C” indi- & To use as full-automatic cli-
cator light on the air conditioner button mate control system
system (if equipped) illuminates.
Place the temperature control dial in the
Although this climate control system can position for your desired temperature, then
be used as a full-automatic climate control & Control panel set the other dials and buttons as de-
system, it can also, if desired, be used as scribed in the following. The system’s
a semi-automatic climate control system. functions will then switch to AUTO mode
When it is used as a full-automatic climate and be controlled automatically.
control system, the outlet air temperature, . Air flow control dial: AUTO position
fan speed, air flow distribution, air inlet . Fan speed control dial: AUTO position
control, and air conditioner compressor
operation are all automatically controlled & To use as semi-automatic
to maintain a constant, comfortable tem-
perature inside the vehicle.
climate control system
Each function can be individually set to
NOTE AUTO mode independently of the others.
. Operate the automatic climate con- Any function set to AUTO mode is con-
trol system when the engine is running. trolled automatically. Any function not set
. When the engine coolant is cold, the 1) Temperature control dial to AUTO mode can be manually adjusted
blower does not run. 2) Fan speed control dial as desired.
. In the “AUTO” mode, when the air 3) Air flow control dial The temperature can be set within a range
temperature in the passenger compart- 4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to of 65 to 858F (20 to 308C).
ment is sufficiently cool, the air condi- “Rear window defogger button” F3-41.)
tioner compressor does not operate. 5) Air inlet selection button
For efficient defogging or dehumidify- 6) Air conditioner button
ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”
button to operate the air conditioner
compressor.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
setting the temperature much lower
than the current outlet air temperature
turns on the air conditioner compres-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control 4-9
& Fan speed control dial NOTE the system gives maximum cooling per-
With the fan speed control dial in the formance. If the dial is turned fully clock-
AUTO position and the air flow control wise, the system gives maximum heating
dial in the “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” position, performance.
the fan does not operate during engine
warm-up until the engine coolant tem- & Air flow control dial
perature exceeds approximately 1228F
(508C).
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-10 Climate control
: Foot outlets and windshield defroster when driving on a dusty road. The & Air conditioner button
outlets (relatively little air from windshield indicator light will illuminate.
defroster outlets) OFF position (Outside Air): Outside air
: Windshield defroster outlets and foot is drawn into the passenger compartment.
outlets Push the air inlet selection button to the
: Windshield defroster outlets OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
NOTE is no longer dusty. The indicator light will
When the dial is placed in the “ ” or turn off.
“ ” position, the air inlet selection is AUTO: Turn the fan speed control dial and
automatically set to “outside air” air flow control dial to the AUTO position.
mode. The air inlet control is then adjusted
automatically in accordance with the air
& Air inlet selection button temperature inside and outside the pas-
senger compartment, the intensity of sun- The button positions and their functions
light, and other factors. Pressing the air are as follows:
inlet selection button cancels the “AUTO”
ON: The air conditioner operates while the
mode. To return to “AUTO” mode, turn the
fan is running.
fan speed control dial or air flow control
dial to a position other than the AUTO Push the button to select this position. The
position. Then turn to “AUTO” mode. indicator light will illuminate.
SUBARU recommends using the AUTO OFF: The air conditioner does not oper-
position. ate.
Push the button again to select this
WARNING position. The indicator light will turn off.
AUTO: Turn the fan speed control dial and
Continued operation in the ON posi- air flow control dial to the AUTO position.
tion may fog up the windows. Switch The air conditioner compressor operation
ON position (Recirculation): Interior air to the OFF position as soon as the is then adjusted automatically in accor-
is recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the outside dusty condition clears. dance with the air temperature inside and
air inlet selection button to the ON position outside the passenger compartment, the
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or intensity of sunlight, and other factors.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control 4-11
Pressing the button cancels the “AUTO” & Temperature sensors properly and become damaged, the sys-
mode. To return to “AUTO” mode, turn the tem may not be able to control the interior
fan speed control dial or air flow control temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
dial to a position other than the AUTO the sensors, observe the following pre-
position. Then turn to “AUTO” mode. cautions:
SUBARU recommends using the AUTO – Do not subject the sensors to impact.
position. – Keep water away from the sensors.
NOTE – Do not cover the sensors.
The air conditioner’s compressor does The sensors are located as follows:
not operate with an outside tempera- – Solar sensor: beside the windshield
ture of 328F (08C) or lower. defroster grille.
– Interior air temperature sensor: near
the ignition switch.
– Outside temperature sensor: behind
the front grille.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-12 Climate control
Operating tips for heater and heated interior. This results in quicker & Air conditioner compressor
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the shut-off when engine is
air conditioner windows closed during the operation of heavily loaded
& Cleaning ventilation grille the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency. To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
& Lubrication oil circulation in to temporarily shut off during air condi-
tioner operation whenever the accelerator
the refrigerant circuit is fully depressed such as during rapid
Operate the air conditioner compressor at acceleration or when driving on a steep
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving upgrade.
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil. & Refrigerant for your climate
control system
& Checking air conditioning
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
system before summer sea- refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-
son od of adding, changing or checking the
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger- refrigerant is different from the method for
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions operation each spring. Have your dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting. SUBARU dealer perform this check. result of using the wrong refrigerant are
Since the condenser is located in front of not covered under warranty.
the radiator, this area should be kept clean & Cooling and dehumidifying in
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
high humidity and low tem-
on the condenser. perature weather conditions
Under certain weather conditions (high
& Efficient cooling after parking relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
in direct sunlight small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with condition is normal and does not indicate
the windows open for a few minutes to any problem with the air conditioning
allow outside air to circulate into the system.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Climate control 4-13
Replace the filter element according to the & Replacing an air filter
replacement schedule as follows. This
schedule should be followed to maintain 1. Remove the glove box.
the filter’s dust collection ability. Under (1) Open the glove box.
extremely dusty conditions, the filter
should be replaced more frequently. It is
recommended that you have your filter
checked or replaced by your SUBARU
dealer. For replacement, use only a
genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
CAUTION
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the glove box.
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter:
– Reduction of the air flow through
the vents.
– Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
2. Remove the air filter.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
4-14 Climate control
3. Replace the air filter element with a 4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect 1) Caution label
new one. the damper shaft. (2) Attach the caution label next to the
5. Close the glove box. air filter as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION 6. LABEL installation
The arrow mark on the filter must (1) Attach the service label to the
point UP. driver’s side door pillar.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio
Antenna system .................................................. 5-2 Channel and category selection ......................... 5-14
Roof antenna ...................................................... 5-2 Channel preset .................................................. 5-15
FM reception ....................................................... 5-2 Display selection ............................................... 5-16
XMTM satellite radio reception (if equipped)...... 5-2 CD player operation .......................................... 5-16
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-4 How to insert a CD (type A)................................ 5-17
Audio set ............................................................. 5-5 How to insert a CD(s) (type B)............................ 5-17
Type A audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-5 How to play back a CD ...................................... 5-18
Type B audio set (if equipped) ............................. 5-6 To select a track from its beginning.................... 5-19
Power and sound controls ................................. 5-7 Fast-forwarding and fast-reversing ..................... 5-20 5
Power switch and volume control ........................ 5-7 Repeating .......................................................... 5-20
Sound control ..................................................... 5-7 Random playback .............................................. 5-21
Adjustable level of each mode ............................. 5-9 Scan ................................................................. 5-22
Display selection ............................................... 5-22
FM/AM radio operation ...................................... 5-10
Folder selection ................................................. 5-23
FM/AM selection................................................. 5-10
How to eject a CD from the player (type A) ......... 5-23
Tuning ............................................................... 5-10
How to eject CDs from the player (type B) .......... 5-23
Displaying radio PS (Program Service Name) and
RT (Radio Text) ................................................ 5-12 When the following messages are displayed....... 5-24
Station preset .................................................... 5-12 AUX unit operation ............................................ 5-25
Satellite radio operation (if equipped) .............. 5-13 AUX jack ........................................................... 5-25
TM
XM satellite radio ............................................ 5-13 AUX inputs selection button............................... 5-25
Sirius satellite radio ........................................... 5-13 Audio control buttons (if equipped) ................. 5-26
Satellite radio reception...................................... 5-13 MODE button ..................................................... 5-26
Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner ................... 5-13 Precautions to observe when handling a
Band selection ................................................... 5-14 compact disc................................................... 5-27
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-2 Audio
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-3
. If you are driving in a tunnel or a . If you are driving in an area with tall
covered parking area trees that block the signal (33 ft (10 m) or
. If you are driving beneath the top level more), for example on a road that goes
of a multi-level freeway through a dense forest
. If you drive under a bridge . The signal can become weak in some
. If you are driving next to a tall vehicle areas that are not covered by the repeater
(such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the station network.
signal Please note that these may be other
The signal comes from the south and may . If you are driving in a valley where the unforeseen circumstances when there
not be able to reach the antenna in some surrounding hills or peaks block the signal are problems with the reception of XMTM
circumstances when you are driving north. from the south satellite radio signals.
. If you are driving on a mountain road
where the southern direction is blocked by
mountains
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-4 Audio
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing a citizen band radio or
other transmitting device in your vehicle.
Such devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not
suited for the vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-5
Audio set The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one of the following audio sets. See the pages position.
indicated in this section for operating details. . Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-7
& Type A audio set (if equipped) . Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-13
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-16
. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-25
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-6 Audio
& Type B audio set (if equipped) The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. Power and sound controls: refer to
page 5-7
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-10
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to page 5-13
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-16
. AUX unit operation: refer to page 5-25
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-7
Power and sound controls & Sound control ! Other sound setting controls
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-8 Audio
track/channel control mode after approxi- speakers can be heard at ear level
mately 5 seconds. (built in SRS FOCUS effect).
2) Ultra rich bass sound can be ob-
! SPEED VOLUME setting tained from standard door mount
SPEED VOLUME CONTROL is a function speakers (built in SRS TruBass effect).
that automatically adjusts the volume 3) Surround sound can be obtained
according to the vehicle speed. As the from 2-channel stereo sources such as
vehicle speed increases, the audio vo- CD, MP3 and FM (built in SRS Circle
lume automatically increases to match the Surround II effect).
vehicle speed, in order to create a 4) SRS CS Auto can position the
pleasant listening environment even as center channel image in the center of
the driving noise increases. The amount of the vehicle’s windshield. This elimi-
this automatic volume change can be set nates the need for a center speaker
in the range from OFF to 2. The initial (built in SRS Circle Surround II phan-
setting is OFF. tom center and SRS FOCUS effects).
! BEEP setting CS Auto, TruBass, FOCUS, Circle Sur-
A beep sound (operation sound) that round-II, SRS and “ ” symbol are
occurs when the audio system is operated trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
can be set ON/OFF. The initial setting is CS Auto technology is incorporated
ON. under license from SRS Labs, inc.
! SRS CS Auto setting (type B audio)
SRS CS Auto can be set ON/OFF. When
this setting is ON, “ ” is displayed on the
screen.
NOTE
SRS CS Auto creates a 5.1ch equiva-
lent surround field using 10 speakers
that are installed in the vehicle.
SRS CS Auto features:
1) Sound originating from door mount
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-9
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-10 Audio
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-11
! Scan tuning (SCAN) ! PTY (Program type) group tuning ! PTY (Program type) group selection
(only FM reception)
If you press the “SCAN” button, the radio In PTY selection mode, press the “PTY”
will switch to the scan mode. In this mode, Press the “PTY/CAT” button to change to button “ ” or “ ” to change the PTY
the radio scans through the radio band the PTY selection mode. At this time, the group by one step at a time.
until a station is found. The radio will stop PTY group that you are currently listening Pressing “ ” changes the PTY group up
at the station for 5 seconds while display- to will be displayed for 10 seconds. In PTY by one step. Pressing “ ” changes the
ing the frequency, after which scanning selection mode, “PTY” is displayed on the PTY group down by one step.
will continue until the entire band has been screen. This operation only changes the display. It
scanned.
does not change the station that is
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel currently being received.
the SCAN mode and to stop at any
displayed channel.
Automatic tuning may not function prop-
erly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to
tall buildings and hills.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-12 Audio
! Seek in PTY (Program type) group & Displaying radio PS (Pro- & Station preset
gram Service Name) and RT
! How to preset stations
(Radio Text)
1. Press the “FM AM” button to select
FM1, FM2, FM3 or AM reception.
2. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK” button or tune the radio manually
until the desired station frequency is
displayed.
3. Press one of the preset buttons for
more than 1.5 seconds to store the
frequency. If the button is pressed for less
than 1.5 seconds, the preceding selection
will remain in memory.
In the PTY selection mode, when the
desired PTY group has been selected, NOTE
pressing the “SEEK” button “ ” or “ ” If the PS (Program Service Name) and/or . If the connection between the radio
seeks within that PTY group. RT (Radio Text) are available, pressing and battery is broken for any reason
Pressing “ ” seeks up. Pressing “ ” the “TEXT” button changes the display such as vehicle maintenance or radio
seeks down. among PS, RT and frequency. The initial removal, all stations stored in the
The control function returns to the normal setting is “PS”. preset buttons are cleared. If this
mode after approximately 10 seconds. occurs, it is necessary to reset the
NOTE preset buttons.
. The maximum number of characters . If a cell phone is placed near the
that can be displayed for PS is 8. radio, it may cause the radio to emit
. The maximum number of characters noise when it receives calls. This noise
that can be displayed for RT is 64. does not indicate a radio malfunction.
. If RT is 13 characters or longer,
press and hold the “TEXT” button for
0.5 second or longer in order to change
the page.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-13
! Selecting preset stations Satellite radio operation (if dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at
www.sirius.com or call 1-888-539-SIRIUS
equipped) (7474) for more information. Sirius, the
To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to Sirius dog logo, channel names and logos
install the SUBARU genuine satellite are trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio
receiver (optional equipment) and to enter Inc.
into a contract. For details, please contact
your SUBARU dealer. & Satellite radio reception
Satellite radio signals are best received in
& XMTM satellite radio areas with a clear view of the open sky. In
XMTM is a continental U.S. based satellite areas where there are tall buildings, trees,
radio service including music, news, tunnels or other structures that may
sports, talk and children’s programming. obstruct the signal of the satellites, there
XMTM provides digital quality audio and may be signal interruptions. Other circum-
Presetting a station with a preset button text information, including song title and stances that may result in signal loss
allows you to select that station in a single artist name. A service fee is required to include driving near a wall, steep cliff, hill
operation. Up to six AM, FM1, FM2 and receive the XMTM service. For more or driving on the lower level of a multi-
FM3 stations each may be preset. information, contact XMTM at tiered road or inside of a parking garage.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-XM- To help reduce this condition, satellite
RADIO (1-800-967-2346) for U.S., radio providers have installed ground-
www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-GET-XMSR (1- based repeaters in heavily populated
877-438-9677) for Canada. areas. However, you may still experience
reception problems in some areas.
& Sirius satellite radio
& Displaying satellite radio ID
Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation
that allows the listener to experience of tuner
digital sound quality and to have a greater When you activate satellite radio, you
variety of channels. should have your satellite radio tuner ID
Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a ready because each tuner is identified by
tuner, antenna and a service contract. For its unique satellite radio tuner ID.
details, please contact your SUBARU The satellite radio ID will be needed when
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-14 Audio
you activate satellite radio and receive tion. ! Skip channel selection
satellite radio customer support.
The satellite radio ID can be found on the & Channel and category selec-
audio display by tuning the channel to “0”. tion
Turn the “CH” dial to select the satellite
radio channel. ! Channel selection
NOTE
For Sirius, change the display to an
indication mode other than the channel
number after performing the above
operation.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-15
NOTE
When in the SAT mode, press the “CAT” If the connection between the radio and
Press the “SCAN” button to change the battery is broken for any reason such
button “ ” or “ ” to change to the radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode,
category search mode. as vehicle maintenance or radio re-
under the selected category, the radio moval, all channels stored in the preset
When in the category search mode, scans through the channel until a station buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is
pressing the “CAT” button “ ” changes is found. The radio will stop at the station necessary to reset the preset buttons.
the category up by one step. Pressing “ ” for 5 seconds while displaying the channel
changes the category down by one step. number, after which scanning will continue
When a category is selected, turning the until the entire channel has been scanned
“CH” dial selects channels only within the from the low end to the high end.
selected category. Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
The control function returns to the normal the SCAN mode and to stop on any
mode after approximately 10 seconds. displayed channel.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-16 Audio
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-17
& How to insert a CD (type A) no idle position in the magazine. ! Inserting a disc in a desired posi-
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole 2. When the “LOAD” indicator illumi- tion
while gripping the edge of the disc, then nates, insert the disc. Once you have
insert it in to the slot (with the label side inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will
up) and the player will automatically pull turn off. The disc will then be automatically
the disc into position. drawn in, and the player will begin to play
back the first track of the disc.
NOTE
. To insert more discs in succession,
DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO THE repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will
DISC INSERTION SLOT AT A TIME. be loaded with discs in the ascending
order of position number.
& How to insert a CD(s) (type B) If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds
after you have pressed the “LOAD” button,
the player will begin to play back the first
track of the last disc you have inserted.
. The disc indicator steadily lights up if a 1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button. If the
disc is already inserted in the correspond- magazine in the player has an idle
ing position of the magazine. position where you can insert a disc, the
. While the player is in the loading mode, disc number indicator associated with the
if you press “FM/AM”, “SAT” or “AUX” idle position will blink.
button, the player will enter the standby The positions in the magazine the indica-
mode. Press the “CD” button to start tor of which steadily lights up are already
playback. loaded with discs.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-18 Audio
Press the “CD” button to start playback. start playback of the discs, beginning with
! Loading all the magazine (full disc the one inserted first.
loading mode) If you fail to insert any disc during each 15
seconds interval, the full disc loading
mode will be canceled, and the player will
start playback of the disc inserted first.
& How to play back a CD
! When there is no CD inserted
Insert a CD by referring to “How to insert a
CD (type A)” F5-17/“How to insert a CD
(s) (type B)” F5-17.
2. Press the disc select button at the When a CD is loaded, the player will start
position where you want to insert a disc. playback of the CD, beginning with the
3. When the “LOAD” indicator illumi- first track.
nates, insert the disc. Once you have
1. If you continue to press the “LOAD” ! When CD is in the player (type A)
inserted the disc, the “LOAD” indicator will
turn off. The disc will then be automatically button for more than 1.5 seconds, the
drawn in, and the player will begin to play player will produce beep sound and will
the first track on the disc. enter the full disc loading mode.
2. When the disc number indicator
. If you wish to insert another disc, flashes and “ALL LOAD” indicator illumi-
repeat the procedure beginning with step nates, insert a disc within 15 seconds. If a
1. disc is successfully loaded during this
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds period, the disc number indicator will stop
after you have pressed the “LOAD” button, blinking and will steadily light.
the player will begin to play back the first 3. When the loading of a disc is com-
track of the last disc you have inserted. plete, the next disc number indicator will
. While the player is in the loading mode, blink. Then repeat Step 2.
if you press “FM/AM”, “SAT” or “AUX” 4. When the magazine is filled with discs
button, the player will enter standby mode. by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will When the “CD” button is pressed, the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-19
player will start playback. & To select a track from its ! Backward direction
! When there are CDs loaded (type B) beginning
! Forward direction
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-20 Audio
Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” button To repeat a track/file (track), briefly press
continuously to fast-reverse the disc/ the “RPT” button while the track/file (track)
folder. is playing.
Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK” button
Release the button to stop fast-reversing. Each time you briefly press the button, the
continuously to fast-forward the disc/
folder. mode changes in the following se-
NOTE quences.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding. If you fast-reverse to the beginning of Type A audio:
NOTE the first track/file (track), fast-reversing
will stop and the player will start play-
If you fast-forward to the end of the last back.
track/file (track), fast-forwarding will
stop and the player will start playback
beginning with the first track/file Type B audio:
(track).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-21
NOTE & Random playback format CD is playing.
. The “RPT” indication refers to the . The “F-RDM” indication refers to the
repeat playback of a single track. It random playback in the folder. It ran-
repeats the track that is playing. domly repeats the tracks in the folder. It
. The “F-RPT” indication refers to the is possible to select the function when
repeat playback of a folder. It repeats an MP3/WMA format track is playing.
the all of the tracks in the folder. It is . The “D-RDM” indication refers to the
possible to select the function when random playback of a disc. It randomly
the MP3/WMA format track is playing. repeats the tracks in the CD. It is
. The “D-RPT” indication refers to the possible to select the function when
repeat playback of a disc. It repeats the an MP3/WMA format track is playing.
tracks on the CD. It is only possible to To cancel the random playback mode,
select this function for type B audio. press the “RPT” button again and select
To cancel the track/file (track) repeat-play CANCEL.
mode, briefly press the “RPT” button To playback a track/file(s) at random, The “RDM” indication will turn off, and the
twice. The “RPT” indication will turn off, press the “RPT” button for 0.5 second or normal playback mode will be resumed.
and the normal playback mode will be longer while the track/file is playing.
resumed. NOTE
Each time you press the button, the mode
changes in the following sequences. Random playback will be cancelled if
NOTE you perform any of the following steps:
The repeat-play mode will be cancelled . Press the “RPT” button and select
if you perform any of the following CANCEL
steps: . Press the “ ” button
. Press the “RPT” button and select . Press the disc select button
CANCEL . Press the “SCAN” button
. Press the “ ” button . Press the “LOAD” button when
. Press the disc select button NOTE there is free space in the CD magazine.
. Press the “SCAN” button . The “RDM” indication refers to the
. Press the “LOAD” button when random playback of the tracks. It
there is free space in the CD magazine. randomly repeats the tracks on the
CD. It is possible to select the function
when formats other than the MP3/WMA
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-22 Audio
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-23
& Folder selection & How to eject a CD from the & How to eject CDs from the
player (type A) player (type B)
! Ejecting a CD from the player
Of the discs loaded, you can select and
remove only one disc.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-24 Audio
! Ejecting all discs from the player the player is in all disc ejection mode,
(all disc ejection mode) the mode will be cancelled following
ejection of the disc that is currently
being ejected.
. If you press the “CD” button or
“LOAD” button while the player is in
all disc ejection mode, the player will
draw in the discs that have been
ejected and play them.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-25
! When “CHECK DISC” is displayed AUX unit operation By connecting a commercial audio pro-
Press the eject button to unload the discs. duct to the vehicle, such as portable audio
Check that the disc is not damaged or & AUX jack player, you can hear its sound via the
scratched, and also check that the disc is vehicle’s speaker.
inserted correctly. This message may Connect the portable audio player and
appear when using some CD-RW discs. push the “CD/AUX” button.
Check that the disc type (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch For the audio input jack, a stereo mini pin
CDs are not supported) and data format plug (3.5ø) can be connected. For detailed
are correct. This player can only play MP3 information, see the Owner’s Manual of
and WMA data formats. If the disc cannot the portable audio player.
be unloaded or this message remains
displayed, please contact your SUBARU & AUX inputs selection button
dealer.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-26 Audio
via the vehicle’s speakers that are Audio control buttons (if *1: The frequency last received in the selected
connected to the vehicle audio set is waveband will be displayed.
very small. If you turn up the volume of
equipped)
*2: Only when a CD is in the player.
the audio set, the volume becomes These buttons are located on the spokes *3: Only when with an auxiliary audio product is
louder. However, when you change of the steering wheel. They allow the connected.
the player to the other portable audio driver to control audio functions without
player, the sound may become a lot taking his/her hands off the steering ! “ ” and “ ” buttons
louder. Turn down the volume when wheel.
you change between them.
. In some cases, when the sound
volume of the portable audio player is
& MODE button
low, the sound becomes bad when you
turn up the volume of the vehicle audio
system. In this case, adjust the sound
volume of the portable audio player.
. In some cases, noise occurs be-
cause of a bad connection between the
portable player of the vehicle audio
system or for the player.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-27
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
5-28 Audio
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Audio 5-29
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior equipment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-2 Interior equipment
Interior lights door) are closed or if the key is turned to & Cargo area light (5-door
the “ON” position.
models)
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the When the dome light switch is in the
light turns off to avoid battery discharge. DOOR position, the dome light also
illuminates by use of the remote keyless
& Dome light entry system or when the alarm system is
triggered.
The setting of the period for which the light
stays on can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
details.
! OFF DELAY function
When the dome light switch is in the
“DOOR” position, the dome light illumi-
nates and gradually turns off when any of ON position: The light illuminates when
the following operations is performed. the rear gate is opened. The light remains
. when the ignition switch is turned from illuminated for several seconds and gra-
the “Acc” to “LOCK” position dually turns off after the rear gate is
1) ON
2) DOOR . when the doors are closed after the closed.
3) OFF doors are open OFF position: The light remains off.
. when the doors are unlocked using the
The dome light switch has three positions: remote keyless entry transmitter
ON: The light remains illuminated con- The dome light turns off when one the
tinuously. following operations is performed.
OFF: The light remains off. . when the ignition switch is turned to the
DOOR: The light illuminates when any of “Acc” or ”ON” position
the doors (or the rear gate on the 5-door) . when the doors are locked using the
is opened. The light remains illuminated remote keyless entry transmitter
for several seconds and gradually turns off
after all doors (and the rear gate on the 5-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior equipment 6-3
& Map lights When leaving the vehicle, make sure the Sun visors
light is turned off to avoid battery dis-
charge.
! OFF DELAY function (vehicle with
moonroof)
The map light illuminates when any of the
doors or the rear gate (5-door) is opened.
The light remains illuminated for several
seconds and gradually turns off after all
doors and the rear gate are closed or if the
key is turned to the “ON” position.
The setting of this function to operational/
non-operational status can be changed by
Vehicle with moonroof a SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-4 Interior equipment
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior equipment 6-5
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,
if hot, might burn you or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery, carpets or
audio equipment.
A coin tray is built in the center console. The dual cup holder is built into the center
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-6 Interior equipment
console near the parking brake lever. cups of different sizes to be held. & Rear passenger’s cup holder
(if equipped)
CAUTION
When not in use, always keep the
cup holder stored while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a sudden stop or an accident.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior equipment 6-7
Bottle holders trim can be used to hold beverage bottles Accessory power outlets
and other items.
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
door pocket, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could scald Power outlet below the climate controls
you.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-8 Interior equipment
outlets simultaneously, the total power neously, the total power con-
consumed by them must not exceed sumed by them must not exceed
120W. 120W. Overloading the accessory
power outlet can cause a short
CAUTION circuit. Do not use dual adapters
or more than one electrical appli-
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette ance.
lighter in the accessory power
outlets. . If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
. Do not place any foreign objects, tight for the accessory power
especially metal ones such as outlet, this can result in a poor
coins or aluminum foil, into the contact or cause the plug to get
accessory power outlet. That stuck. Only use plugs that fit
Power outlet in the center console could cause a short circuit. Al- properly.
(WRX STI) ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not . Use of an electric appliance in the
Accessory power outlets are provided
in use. accessory power outlet for a long
below the climate controls and in the
period of time while the engine is
center console. Electrical power (12V . Use only electrical appliances not running can cause battery
DC) from the battery is available at any which are designed for 12V DC. discharge.
of the outlets when the ignition switch is in The maximum power rating of an
either the “Acc” or “ON” position. . Before driving your vehicle, make
appliance that can be connected sure that the plug and the cord
You can use an in-vehicle electrical varies among outlets as indi-
appliance by connecting it to an outlet. on your electrical appliance will
cated below. Do not use an not interfere with your shifting
The maximum power rating of an appli- appliance which exceeds the in- gears and operating the accel-
ance that can be connected varies among dicated wattage for each outlet. erator and brake pedals. If they
outlets as indicated below. Do not use an Outlet below the climate con- do, do not use the electrical
appliance which exceeds the indicated trols: 80W or less appliance while driving.
wattage for each outlet.
Outlet below the climate controls: 80W or Outlet in the center console:
less 120W or less
Outlet in the center console: 120W or less When using appliances con-
When using appliances connected to two nected to two outlets simulta-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior equipment 6-9
& Use with a cigarette lighter (if uine SUBARU cigarette lighter Ashtray (if equipped)
equipped) plug. Do not use a non-genuine
cigarette lighter plug in the sock- Fully close the ashtray after using it to help
To use the accessory power outlet in the
et. Doing so may cause a short- reduce residual smoke.
center console as a cigarette lighter
circuit and overheating, resulting
socket, purchase the cigarette lighter plug,
which is an optional accessory.
in a fire. CAUTION
A cigarette lighter plug is available from . If the socket is ever used for a
Do not use ashtrays as waste re-
your SUBARU dealer. plug-in accessory such as a cell
ceptacles or leave a lighted cigarette
phone, that may damage the
The cigarette lighter operates only when in an ashtray. This could cause a
portion of the socket’s internal
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” fire.
mechanism that causes a cigar-
position.
ette lighter plug to “pop out”
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the after its lighter element is heated.
knob and wait a few moments. It will NOTE
Therefore, do not place a cigar- Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
automatically spring up when ready for ette lighter plug in a socket that
use. mulate around the hinges of the ash-
has been used, even once, to tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
power a plug-in accessory. Doing toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
WARNING so may cause the plug to stick implement.
To avoid being burned, never grasp and overheat, creating a potential
the lighter by the end with the fire hazard.
heating element. Doing so could
result in injury and could also
damage the heating element.
CAUTION
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
because it will overheat.
. The electrical power socket lo-
cated in the center console is
originally designed to use a gen-
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-10 Interior equipment
& Center console & Rear ashtray ! WRX STI (if equipped)
! Except WRX STI
A portable ashtray serves as a front The rear ashtray is located on the upper
ashtray. The ashtray is available from side of the back of the center console. To
your SUBARU dealer. A portable ashtray serves as a rear open the ashtray, pull the upper edge of
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the ashtray. The ashtray is available from the lid.
ashtray. your SUBARU dealer.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the To remove the ashtray for cleaning, open it
Fully close the lid after using it to help and pull it out while pushing the inner plate
reduce residual smoke. ashtray.
Fully close the lid after using it to help down.
reduce residual smoke.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior equipment 6-11
Floor mat (if equipped) Shopping bag hook (5-door) Cargo area cover (5-door – if
equipped)
A retaining pin is located on the driver’s
side floor. CAUTION The cargo area cover is provided for
The floor mat is secured using the built-in covering the cargo area and to protect its
Do not hang items on the shopping
grommets, by placing the grommets over contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
the pins and pushing them downward. detachable to make room for additional
more.
cargo.
CAUTION
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
Make sure the driver’s floor mat is side of the cargo area.
placed back in its proper location To extend the cover, pull the end of the
and correctly secured on its retain- cover out of the housing, then insert its
ing pins. Also, do not use more than hooks into the catches as shown. To
one floor mat. If the floor mat slips rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
forward and interferes with the it will rewind automatically. You should
movement of the pedals during hold on to the cover and guide it back into
driving, it could cause an accident. the cover housing while it is rewinding.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-12 Interior equipment
WARNING & To remove the cover & To install the cover housing
1. Rewind the cover. 1. Shorten the bar.
Do not place anything on the ex-
tended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover.
Scratches on the stays could cause 2. Push the bar to the right side and 2. Insert the projections located on the
leakage of gas from the stays, which shorten the bar. both ends of the sleeve into the recesses
may result in their inability to hold 3. Take it off the retainer. of the retainers.
the rear gate open.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Interior equipment 6-13
5-door models
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
6-14 Interior equipment
CAUTION
. Always keep the lids closed while
driving to reduce the risk of
injury in the event of a sudden
stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-3
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-4 Starting and operating
! MMT your vehicle, but should contain no more . If undesirable driveability problems are
Some gasoline contains an octane-en- than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the experienced and you suspect they may be
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- proper operation of your SUBARU. fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If line before seeking service at your
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are SUBARU dealer.
you use such fuels, your emission control now producing reformulated gasolines,
system performance may deteriorate and which are designed to reduce vehicle . Fuel system damage or driveability
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal- emissions. SUBARU approves the use of problems which result from the use of
function indicator lamp may turn on. If this reformulated gasoline. improper fuel are not covered under the
happens, return to your authorized SUBARU Limited Warranty.
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
determined that the condition is caused you should ask your service station CAUTION
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not operators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
be covered by your warranty.
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis- surfaces of the vehicle. Because
! Gasoline for cleaner air sions. fuel may damage the paint, be sure
Your use of gasoline with detergent to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
additives will help prevent deposits from As additional guidance, only use fuels Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
forming in your engine and fuel system. suited for your vehicle as explained in the is not covered under the SUBARU
This helps keep your engine in tune and following description. Limited Warranty.
your emission control system working . Fuel should be unleaded and have an
properly, and is a way of doing your part octane rating no lower than that specified
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a in this manual.
high quality fuel with the proper detergent . Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
and other additives, you should never sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
need to add any fuel system cleaning Methanol can be used in your vehicle
agents to your fuel tank. ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
Many gasolines are now blended with sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
materials called oxygenates. Use of these vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner. prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol under these conditions.
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-5
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-6 Starting and operating
. When opening the cap, grasp it the tank and create a fire hazard.
firmly and turn it slowly to the
left. Do not remove the cap 5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
quickly. Fuel may be under pres- pump automatically stops. Do not add any
sure and spray out of the fuel more fuel.
filler neck, especially in hot 6. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
weather. If you hear a hissing until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain
sound while you are removing not to catch the tether under the cap while
the cap, wait for the sound to tightening.
stop and then slowly open the 7. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
cap to prevent fuel from spraying
out and creating a fire hazard. If you spill any fuel on the painted surface,
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the
painted surface could be damaged.
4. Hook the cord that is attached to the
fuel filler cap onto the hook inside the fuel
filler lid (except WRX STI). NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
WARNING gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
door (lid) is located on the right side of
. When refueling, insert the fuel the vehicle.
nozzle securely into the fuel filler . If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not until it clicks or if the tether is caught
fully inserted, its automatic stop- under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
ping mechanism may not func- warning light may illuminate. Refer to
tion, causing fuel to overflow the “CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
tank and creating a fire hazard. function indicator lamp” F3-19.
3. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder . Stop refueling when the auto-
inside the fuel filler lid (WRX STI). matic stop mechanism on the CAUTION
fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
tinue to add fuel, temperature . Never add any cleaning agents to
changes or other conditions the fuel tank. The addition of a
may cause fuel to overflow from cleaning agent may cause da-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-7
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-8 Starting and operating
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-9
Starting the engine If the engine does not start, try the engine warms up.
following.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the NOTE
CAUTION “OFF” position and wait for at least
The engine may be difficult to start
10 seconds. After checking that the
Do not operate the starter motor when the battery has been discon-
parking brake is firmly set, turn the
continuously for more than 10 sec- nected and reconnected (for mainte-
ignition switch to the “START” position
onds. If the engine fails to start after nance or other purposes). This diffi-
while depressing the accelerator pedal
operating the starter for 5 to 10 culty is caused by the electronically
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
full stroke). Release the accelerator
more before trying again. function. To overcome it, keep the
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
ignition switch in the “ON” position
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn for approximately 10 seconds before
the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
& MT vehicles position and wait for at least 10
starting the engine.
1. Apply the parking brake. seconds. Then fully depress the accel- & AT vehicles
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac- erator pedal and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the 1. Apply the parking brake.
cessories.
engine starts, quickly release the 2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
accelerator pedal. cessories.
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting (3) If this fails to start the engine, turn 3. Shift the selector lever to the “P” or “N”
the engine. the ignition switch again to the “OFF” position (preferably “P” position).
The starter motor will only operate when position. After waiting for 10 seconds The starter motor will only operate when
the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the or longer, turn the ignition switch to the the selector lever is at the “P” or “N”
floor. “START” position without depressing position.
the accelerator pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
(4) If the engine still refuses to start, position and check the operation of the
position and check the operation of the
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer warning and indicator lights. Refer to
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-16.
for assistance. “Warning and indicator lights” F3-16.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
lights have turned off after the engine has position without depressing the accelera-
position without depressing the accelera-
started. The fuel injection system auto- tor pedal. Release the key immediately
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
matically lowers the idle speed as the after the engine has started.
after the engine has started.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-10 Starting and operating
If the engine does not start, try the engine warms up. Stopping the engine
following.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the While the engine is warming up, make
The ignition switch should be turned off
“OFF” position and wait for at least sure that the selector lever is at the “P” or
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
10 seconds. After checking that the “N” position and that the parking brake is
engine is idling.
parking brake is firmly set, turn the applied.
ignition switch to the “START” position NOTE WARNING
while depressing the accelerator pedal
The engine may be difficult to start Do not stop the engine when the
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
when the battery has been discon- vehicle is moving. This will cause
full stroke). Release the accelerator
nected and reconnected (for mainte- loss of power to the power steering
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
nance or other purposes). This diffi- and the brake booster, making steer-
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn culty is caused by the electronically
the ignition switch back to the “OFF” ing and braking more difficult. It
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis could also result in accidental acti-
position and wait for at least 10 function. To overcome it, keep the
seconds. Then fully depress the accel- vation of the “LOCK” position on the
ignition switch in the “ON” position ignition switch, causing the steering
erator pedal and turn the ignition for approximately 10 seconds before
switch to the “START” position. If the wheel to lock.
starting the engine.
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn CAUTION
the ignition switch again to the “OFF” If you restart the engine while the
position. After waiting for 10 seconds vehicle is moving, shift the selector
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the lever into the “N” position. Do not
“START” position without depressing attempt to place the selector lever of
the accelerator pedal. a moving vehicle into the “P” posi-
(4) If the engine still refuses to start, tion.
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-11
Remote engine start system an additional four times. If the vehicle fails
to start after the additional attempts, the
(dealer option) remote engine start system will abort and
return to a non-activated state.
WARNING
& Remote start safety features
. Do not start the engine using the For safety and security reasons, the
remote start system in an en- system will fail to start and beep the horn
closed environment (e.g., in a twice or shut down the engine during
closed garage). Prolonged opera- remote start operation if any of the
tion of a motor vehicle in an following conditions occur.
enclosed environment can cause
. The brake pedal is depressed before
a harmful build-up of Carbon
the vehicle ignition switch is turned “on”.
Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure & Starting your vehicle . The key was already in the ignition
to high levels of Carbon Monox- switch.
The remote engine start system is acti- . The engine hood is opened.
ide can cause headaches, dizzi- vated by pressing the “ ” button twice
ness or in extreme cases uncon- within 3 seconds on your remote engine . The vehicle’s engine idle speed has
sciousness and/or death. start transmitter. The system will check reached a level over 3,000 rpm.
. Before performing any servicing certain pre-conditions before starting, and . The alarm is triggered by opening a
of the vehicle, temporarily place if all safety parameters are correct, the door or the rear gate.
the remote engine start system in engine will start within 5 seconds. While
service mode to prevent the the vehicle is operating via remote engine
NOTE
system from unexpectedly start- start, the vehicle’s power window features . The security indicator light on the
ing the engine. will be disabled. Also, the system has a combination meter will stop flashing
timer and will shut down after 15 minutes if while under remote engine start opera-
you do not operate the vehicle. Press and tion, but the vehicle is still protected.
hold the “ ” button for 2 seconds again to . If the vehicle is entered during
turn the vehicle off. If the vehicle’s starter remote engine start operation, the
cranks but does not start or starts and system will not record entry in the
stalls, the remote engine start system will alarm history.
power off then attempt to start the vehicle
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-12 Starting and operating
& Entering the vehicle while it opened by the remote keyless entry the horn will honk two times and will not
is running via remote start transmitter within a few seconds immedi- start.
ately following remote engine start shut- ! To disengage the service mode
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the down.
remote keyless entry system. If the vehi- Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, depress and hold the brake
cle’s doors are unlocked manually using & Pre-heating or pre-cooling pedal, then press and release the “ ”
the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will
trigger and the remote engine start system
the interior of the vehicle button on the remote engine start trans-
will turn off. Inserting the key into the Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem- mitter three times. The system will pause
ignition switch and turning it to the “ON” perature controls to the desired setting for 1 second and flash the turn signal
position or pressing the unlock button “ ” and operation. After the system starts the lights once indicating that the system has
on the remote keyless entry transmitter vehicle, the heater or air-conditioning will exited service mode.
will disarm the alarm system. Refer to the activate and heat or cool the interior to
“Alarm system” F2-14 section in chapter your setting. NOTE
2. When taking your vehicle in for service,
2. Enter the vehicle. Do not depress the & Service mode it is recommended that you inform the
brake pedal. In service mode, the remote start function service personnel that your vehicle is
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch is temporarily disabled to prevent the equipped with a remote engine start
and turn to the “ON” position. If the ignition system from unexpectedly starting the system.
switch is accidentally turned to the engine while being serviced.
“START” position, the system’s “starter ! To engage the service mode & Remote engine start trans-
anti-grind” feature will prevent the starter mitter programming and pro-
from re-cranking. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, depress and hold the brake
grammable feature option
4. Depress the brake pedal. The remote
starter disengages, the vehicle’s power pedal, then press and release the “ ” New transmitters can be programmed to
button on the remote engine start trans- the remote engine start system in the
window features are re-enabled and the event that remote engine start transmitters
vehicle will operate normally. mitter three times. The system will pause
for 1 second and then flash the turn signal are lost, stolen or damaged. The remote
lights and honk the horn three times engine start system also has one pro-
& Entering the vehicle follow- indicating that the system is in service grammable feature that can be adjusted
ing remote engine start shut- mode. When attempting to activate the for user preference.
down remote start system while in service The remote engine start system can be
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is mode, the turn signal lights will flash and programmed to either make an audible
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-13
horn chirp upon remote start activation or Chirps are “OFF”. The horn will honk and . There is a danger of explosion if
not. Remote engine start transmitter pro- the turn signal lights will flash 2 times to an incorrect replacement battery
gramming and feature programming can indicate Confirmation Horn Chirps are is used. Replace only with the
be adjusted using the following procedure. “ON”. Depressing the brake pedal repeat- same or equivalent type of bat-
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s edly will toggle the feature ON or OFF tery.
door must remain opened throughout the each time. . Batteries should not be exposed
entire process). 7. To exit the remote engine start trans- to excessive heat such as sun-
2. Insert the key into the vehicle’s ignition mitter and feature programming mode, shine, fire or the like.
switch and turn to the “ON” position. turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
3. Locate the small black programming position, remove the key from the ignition The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model
button behind the fuse box cover, on the switch and test operation of the remote CR-1220) supplied in your remote engine
driver’s side left under the dashboard engine start transmitter(s) and horn con- start transmitter should last approximately
panel. firmation feature. three years, depending on usage. When
4. Press and hold the black programming the batteries begin to weaken, you will
button for 10 to 15 seconds. The horn will & System maintenance notice a decrease in range (distance from
honk and the turn signal lights will flash the vehicle that your remote engine start
! Changing the batteries system operates). Follow the instructions
three times to indicate that the system has
entered programming mode. At this point below to change the remote engine start
you can proceed to either step 5 or step 6.
CAUTION transmitter batteries.
5. To program a remote engine start . Do not let dust, oil or water get on
transmitter: press and release the “ ” or in the remote engine start
button on each transmitter. The horn will transmitter when replacing the
honk and the turn signal lights will flash battery.
one time to indicate a successful trans- . Be careful not to damage the
mitter learn each time the “ ” button is printed circuit board in the re-
pressed. You can program up to eight mote engine start transmitter
transmitters. when replacing the battery.
6. To toggle the Horn Confirmation chirps
ON/OFF: depress and release the brake . Be careful not to allow children to
pedal to toggle the feature. The horn will touch the battery and any re-
chirp and the turn signal lights will flash moved parts; children could
one time to indicate Confirmation Horn swallow them.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-14 Starting and operating
1. Carefully pry the remote engine start 2. Remove the circuit board from the
transmitter halves apart using a small flat- bottom half of the case and slide the white
head screwdriver. plastic battery holder out from under the
battery tab releasing the batteries. Re-
move the old batteries and replace with
new ones. Be sure to observe the (+) sign
on the old batteries before removing them
to ensure that the new batteries are
inserted properly (battery “+” should be
pointed away from the transmitter circuit
board on both batteries).
3. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, then test the remote engine start
system.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-15
Manual transmission – 6 WARNING pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch.
speeds (WRX STI)
Do not drive the vehicle with the If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the transmission in neutral, release the clutch
clutch pedal is depressed) or with pedal momentarily, and then try again.
the shift lever in the neutral position.
Engine braking has no effect in CAUTION
either of these conditions and the
risk of an accident is consequently Shift into reverse ONLY when the
increased. vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmis-
sion to try shifting into reverse when
& Selecting reverse gear the vehicle is moving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-16 Starting and operating
! Maximum allowable speeds In addition, sudden application of In this way, the engine provides a braking
The following table shows the maximum engine brakes when the vehicle is effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
speeds that are possible with each differ- travelling on a slippery surface can the brakes while descending a hill, they
ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will lead to wheel locking; as a conse- may overheat and not work properly.
enter the red area if these speeds are quence, control of the vehicle may
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
exceeded. be lost and the risk of an accident
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
With the exception of cases where sudden increased.
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
acceleration is required, the vehicle phenomenon does not indicate a malfunc-
should not be driven with the tachometer’s NOTE tion.
needle inside the red area. Failure to
Never exceed posted speed limits.
observe this precaution can lead to
excessive engine wear and poor fuel
economy. & Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
Gear mph (km/h)
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
1st 30 (49) hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
2nd 50 (81) upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
3rd 74 (119)
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
4th 99 (159) shift lever. This may cause wear on the
transmission components.
WARNING When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
When shifting down a gear, ensure or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
that the vehicle is not travelling at a lower gear before the engine starts to
speed exceeding the Maximum Al- labor.
lowable Speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to On steep downgrades, downshift the
observe this precaution can lead to transmission to 5th, 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear
engine over-revving and this in turn as necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
can result in engine damage. speed and to extend brake pad life.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-17
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-18 Starting and operating
the red area if these speeds are ex- quence, control of the vehicle may phenomenon is not an indication of a
ceeded. Failure to observe this precaution be lost and the risk of an accident problem in your vehicle.
can lead to excessive engine wear and increased.
poor fuel economy.
Non-turbo models
mph (km/h) & Driving tips
1st 32 (51)
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
2nd 53 (86) clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
3rd 76 (122) hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
Turbo models cause clutch damage.
mph (km/h) Do not drive with your hand resting on the
1st 35 (56) shift lever. This may cause wear on the
2nd 58 (94) transmission components.
3rd 85 (137) When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
Never exceed the posted speed limit. or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
lower gear before the engine starts to
WARNING labor.
When shifting down a gear, ensure On steep downgrades, downshift the
that the vehicle is not travelling at a transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as
speed exceeding the Maximum Al- necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
lowable Speed for the gear which is speed and to extend brake pad life.
about to be selected. Failure to In this way, the engine provides a braking
observe this precaution can lead to effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
engine over-revving and this in turn the brakes while descending a hill, they
can result in engine damage. may overheat and not work properly.
In addition, sudden application of
engine brakes when the vehicle is The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
travelling on a slippery surface can when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
lead to wheel locking; as a conse- rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-19
Driver’s Control Center Dif- tial and rear differential. This sound
occurs because of the structure of the
ferential (DCCD) (WRX STI) center differential. It does not indicate a
problem.
WARNING
& To change mode of driver’s
Always use the utmost care when control center differential
driving. Being overconfident be-
cause you are driving a vehicle with
a driver’s control center differential
could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
1) LSD torque
CAUTION 2) Traction torque
3) Initial LSD torque (maximum)
All the indicator lights will flash in 4) Initial LSD torque (minimum)
the event that the driver’s control A) Initial LSD torque (adjustable)
center differential has a malfunc- B) Mechanical LSD torque
tion. Have the vehicle inspected by
your SUBARU dealer. The driver’s control center differential has
an auto mode and a manual mode. In the
auto mode, the system automatically Press the “AUTO-MANU” switch on the
The driver’s control center differential center console to switch from auto mode
allows you to freely change the degree adjusts the initial LSD torque. In the
manual mode, you can change to the to manual mode or vice versa. When you
of limitation of the differential action select the auto mode, the “AUTO” indica-
(limited slip differential (LSD) torque) of desired mode manually by using the
center differential control switch. tor light illuminates. When you select the
your vehicle’s center differential. manual mode, the “AUTO” indicator light
By using the center differential control NOTE turns off.
switch, you can set an initial LSD torque to If you rapidly depress and release the
match the road surface conditions, driving accelerator pedal while driving at low
conditions and your driving style. speed, you may hear a knocking sound
from the vicinity of the center differen-
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-20 Starting and operating
& Auto mode The auto mode has 3 modes as follows. the “AUTO [+]” mode. After setting the
mode, “ ” on the combination meter
Mode Operation illuminates.
AUTO [+] This mode emphasizes traction
control and strengthens the
limitation of differential action
that is suitable for driving on
slippery roads for vehicle stabi-
lity.
AUTO This mode is suitable for most
driving situations.
AUTO [−] This mode is suitable when you
seek quick response from the
steering wheel and smooth
driving.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-21
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-22 Starting and operating
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-23
Automatic transmission “R” position or vice versa until allow the transmission to shift at the
the vehicle has completely most appropriate times for the current
The automatic transmission is electroni- stopped. Such shifting may condition of your vehicle. Optimized
cally controlled and provides 4 forward cause damage to the transmis- shifting will be restored as the vehicle
speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a sion. continues to be driven for a while.
manual mode and a SPORT mode. . When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake NOTE (non-turbo models only)
WARNING and then place the selector lever To protect the engine while the “P” or
in the “P” position. Avoid parking “N” position is selected, the engine is
Do not shift from the “P” or “N” controlled so that the engine speed
for a long time with the selector
position into the “D” or “R” position may not become too high even if the
lever in any other position as
while depressing the accelerator accelerator pedal is pressed hard.
doing so could result in a dead
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
battery.
to jump forward or backward.
& Selector lever
NOTE
CAUTION
. When the engine coolant tempera-
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position ture is still low, the automatic transmis-
only after the vehicle is comple- sion will upshift to higher engine
tely stopped. Shifting while the speeds than when the coolant tempera-
vehicle is moving may cause ture is sufficiently high in order to
damage to the transmission. shorten the warm-up time and improve
driveability. The gearshift timing will
. Do not race the engine for more
automatically shift to the normal timing
than 5 seconds in any position
after the engine has warmed up.
except the “N” or “P” position
. Immediately after ATF (automatic
when the brake is set or when
transmission fluid) is replaced, you
chocks are used in the wheels.
may feel that the automatic transmis-
This may cause the automatic : Shifting is possible with the brake pedal
sion operation is somewhat unusual.
transmission fluid to overheat. depressed
This results from invalidation of data
. Avoid shifting from one of the : Shifting is possible whether the brake
which the on-board computer has pedal is depressed or not
forward driving positions into the collected and stored in memory to
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-24 Starting and operating
The selector lever has four positions, “P”, refer to “Selector lever reverse inhibiting creased.
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has manual gate for function” F7-25.
using “SPORT” mode or manual mode. ! N (Neutral) ! D (Drive)
! P (Park) This position is for restarting a stalled This position is for normal driving.
This position is for parking the vehicle and engine. The transmission automatically shifts into
starting the engine. In this position the wheels and transmis- a suitable gear from 1st to 4th according to
In this position, the transmission is me- sion are not locked. In this position, the the vehicle speed and the acceleration
chanically locked to prevent the vehicle transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll you require.
from rolling freely. freely, even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or foot brake is applied. When more acceleration is required in this
When you park the vehicle, first set the position, depress the accelerator pedal
Avoid coasting with the transmission in
parking brake fully, then shift into the “P” neutral.
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only transmission will automatically downshift
the transmission. During coasting, there is no engine brak- to 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you release
ing effect. the pedal, the transmission will return to
To shift the selector lever from the “P” to the original gear position.
any other position, you should depress the NOTE
If the selector lever is in the “N” To use the “SPORT” mode, move the lever
brake pedal fully then move the selector
position when you stop the engine for from this position into the manual gate. To
lever. This prevents the vehicle from
parking, you may not subsequently be use the manual mode, move the lever
lurching when it is started.
able to move it to the “R” and “P” from this position into the manual gate
! R (Reverse) then move it toward the “+” and “−” ends.
positions. If this happens, turn the
This position is for backing the vehicle. ignition switch to the “ON” position. ! While climbing a grade
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop You will then be able to move the When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to
the vehicle completely then move the selector lever to the “P” position. 4th gear is prevented from taking place
lever to the “R” position. when the accelerator is released. This
When the ignition switch has been turned WARNING minimizes the chance of subsequent
to the “LOCK” position, movement of the downshifting to a lower gear when accel-
selector lever from the “N” position to the Do not drive the vehicle with the erating again. This prevents repeated
“R” position is possible for a limited time selector lever in the “N” (neutral) upshifting and downshifting resulting in a
period by depressing the brake pedal, and position. Engine braking has no smoother operation of the vehicle.
then it becomes impossible. For details, effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently in-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-25
NOTE The function becomes operational when ! Selector lever release button
The transmission may downshift to 2nd the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi-
or 1st gear, depending on the way the mately 6 mph (10 km/h). Once opera-
accelerator pedal is depressed to ac- tional, it prevents the selector lever from
celerate the vehicle again. being moved from the “N” position to the
“R” position. When the vehicle speed
! While going down a hill drops below 6 mph (10 km/h), the function
When you are descending a hill or any is canceled. The selector lever can then
other slope while braking with the be moved to the “R” and “P” positions.
“SPORT” mode selected, the transmission When the ignition switch has been turned
may downshift to 3rd or 2nd gear depend- to the “LOCK” position, movement of the
ing on how hard you depress the brake selector lever from the “N” position to the
pedal, causing engine braking to work. “R” position is possible for a limited time
Reacceleration for a short time will cause period by depressing the brake pedal and
the transmission to upshift normally. then becomes impossible. Also, the se- If you inadvertently have turned the igni-
NOTE lector lever cannot be moved to the “R” tion switch to the “LOCK” position with the
position after it has been placed in the “P” selector lever in the “N” position, proceed
. A 4th-to-3rd automatic downshift position and then placed again in the “N” as follows.
will not occur at speeds above 50 position.
mph (80 km/h) and a 3rd-to-2nd auto- 1. Remove the shift lock release cover.
matic downshift will not occur at When the movement of the selector lever Refer to “Shift lock release” F7-28.
speeds above 24 mph (38 km/h). from the “N” position to the “R” position 2. Insert a screwdriver into the hole.
. Automatic downshifts to 3rd or 2nd has become impossible, turn the ignition 3. Move the selector lever to the “P”
may occur even when driving on a level switch back to the “ON” position then position.
road depending on conditions, such as move the selector lever to the “P” position.
how hard you depress the brake pedal. Pressing the selector lever release button If the selector lever reverse inhibiting
also makes it possible to move the function fails, have the vehicle inspected
selector lever to the “P” position at this by the nearest SUBARU dealer.
& Selector lever reverse inhi- time.
biting function
This function prevents accidental move-
ment of the selector lever to the “R”
position while the vehicle is moving.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-26 Starting and operating
& Selection of manual mode Gear shifts can be performed by using the
selector lever.
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
With the vehicle either moving or station- 3) Gear position indicator
ary, move the selector lever from the “D” Using the selector lever
position to the manual gate then move it to When the manual mode is selected, the Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly
the “+” end or “−” end of the manual gate gear position indicator and upshift indica- pushing the selector lever toward the “+”
to select manual mode. tor and/or downshift indicator on the end of the manual gate.
combination meter illuminate. The gear Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly
position indicator shows the currently pulling the selector lever toward the “−”
selected gear in the 1st-to-4th-gear range. end of the manual gate.
The upshift and downshift indicators show
when a gear shift is possible. When the NOTE
upshift indicator “ ” is illuminated, up- Please read the following points care-
shifting is possible. When the downshift fully and bear them in mind when using
indicator “ ” is illuminated, downshifting the manual mode.
is possible. When both indicators are . If you attempt to shift down when
illuminated, upshifting and downshifting the engine speed is too high, i.e., when
are both possible. When the vehicle stops a downshift would push the tachometer
(for example, at traffic signals), the down- needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
shift indicator turns off. be emitted to warn you that the down-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-27
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-28 Starting and operating
position on an uphill grade by using the selector lever to the “D” position or select
“D” position. Use the brake instead. manual mode.
. The engine may, on rare occasions, To subsequently reselect SPORT mode,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler- move the selector lever to the “D” position
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill. and from there to the manual gate.
This phenomenon does not indicate a In this mode, the transmission shifts up at
problem. higher vehicle speeds and shifts down
more responsively than in normal mode.
& SPORT mode
& Shift lock release
If the selector lever does not move from
the “P” position with the brake pedal
Turbo models depressed and the ignition switch in the
“ON” position, perform the following steps:
To override the shift lock:
1. Set the parking brake and stop the
engine.
2. Take out the screwdriver from the tool
bag.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-29
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-30 Starting and operating
This is ideal for around-town driving and & Sport (S) mode & Sport Sharp (S#) mode
situations that do not require full power
output. It provides better control in difficult ! For all-around performance driving ! For maximum performance driving
driving conditions, such as slippery roads
or loose surfaces, due to gentler throttle
response.
The Sport (S) mode provides the engine For sports-minded drivers, the Sport
power desired by those who want to make Sharp (S#) mode offers an exhilarating
the driving experience their own personal level of engine performance and control.
When Intelligent (I) mode is selected, a adventure. The throttle becomes more responsive
shift-up indicator “ ” on the combination The linear acceleration characteristic of regardless of the engine speed. Delivering
meter will blink to signal the best time to this versatile mode is ideal for normal maximum driving enjoyment, this mode is
shift gears for maximum fuel efficiency. driving use. ideal for tackling twisting roads and for
merging or overtaking other vehicles on
the freeway with confidence.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-31
& SI-DRIVE selector the same mode as when the engine Limited slip differential (LSD)
was turned off.
When you rotate the SI-DRIVE selector to
. While the engine is running, if the
(WRX STI)
the left, the current SI-DRIVE mode
changes to Sport (S) mode. When you CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc- The LSD provides optimum distribution of
rotate it to the right, the mode changes to tion indicator lamp illuminates, the SI- power according to the difference in
Sport Sharp (S#) mode, and when you DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S) revolutions between the right and left
push it, the mode changes to Intelligent (I) mode. In this case, it is not possible to wheels that may be caused by certain
mode. After performing this operation, the change to the Sport Sharp (S#) mode or driving conditions, thereby improving driv-
switch returns to its original location. Intelligent (I) mode. ing stability on snow-covered, muddy or
. If there is a possibility that the other slippery roads or when high speed
engine could overheat because of a driving.
temperature increase of the engine
coolant, it is not possible to change to CAUTION
the Sport Sharp (S#) mode. While the
vehicle is in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, . Never start the engine while a tire
it changes to the Sport (S) mode when on one side is jacked up, as the
the engine coolant temperature in- vehicle may move.
creases. . If one tire is spinning in mud,
. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicators avoid continued spinning at high
blink, the SI-DRIVE system may be speed as this could adversely
malfunctioning. Contact your SUBARU affect the LSD.
dealer.
. If you use a temporary spare tire
NOTE to replace a flat tire, be sure to
. The next time you turn on the use the original temporary spare
engine, after you turned off the engine tire stored in the vehicle. Using
in the Sport Sharp (S#) mode, the SI- other sizes will adversely affect
DRIVE mode changes to the Sport (S) the LSD.
mode.
. The next time you turn on the
engine, after you turned off the engine
in the Sport (S) mode or Intelligent (I)
mode, the SI-DRIVE mode will stay in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-32 Starting and operating
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-33
! Brake assist system (if equipped) cate any malfunctions, and the brake ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
assist system is operating properly.
tem)
WARNING . You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener- The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
Do not be overconfident about the ates a greater braking force. wheels which may occur during sudden
brake assist. It is not a system that . You might hear clicking (knocking) braking or braking on slippery road sur-
brings more braking ability to the sounds around brake pedal. faces. This helps prevent the loss of
vehicle beyond its braking capabil- steering control and directional stability
ity. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle & Disc brake pad wear warning caused by wheel lock-up.
speed and safe distance. indicators When the ABS system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
CAUTION when the ABS operates.
When you need to brake suddenly, The ABS system will not operate when the
continue depressing the brake pedal vehicle speed is below approximately 6
strongly to bring the effect of the mph (10 km/h).
brake assist.
WARNING
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver Always use the utmost care in
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly driving – overconfidence because
and the brake power is insufficient. you are driving with an ABS
equipped vehicle could easily lead
Brake assist generates the brake power to a serious accident.
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
according to the speed at which the driver
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
depresses the brake pedal.
noise when the brake pads are worn.
NOTE If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard CAUTION
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
When you depress the brake pedal . The ABS system does not always
strongly or suddenly, the following mediately have your vehicle checked by
decrease stopping distance. You
phenomena occur. However, even your SUBARU dealer.
should always maintain a safe
though these occur, they do not indi- following distance from other
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-34 Starting and operating
vehicles. & ABS warning light position and turns off after approximately 2
. When driving on badly surfaced seconds.
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or This is an indication that the ABS system
over deep newly fallen snow, is working properly.
stopping distances may be long- When driving with an insufficient battery
er for a vehicle with the ABS voltage such as when the engine is jump
system than one without. When started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
driving under these conditions, nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
therefore, reduce your speed and and does not indicate a malfunction.
leave ample distance from other When the battery becomes fully charged,
vehicles. the light will turn off.
. When you feel the ABS system
operating, you should maintain
CAUTION
constant brake pedal pressure. If the warning light behaves as
Do not pump the brake pedal Turbo models
described below, the ABS system
since doing so may defeat the may not be working properly.
operation of the ABS system.
When the warning light is on, the
ABS function shuts down; however,
& ABS system self-check the conventional brake system con-
tinues to operate normally.
Just after the vehicle is started, you may
feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar . The warning light does not illu-
to when the ABS operates, and you may minate when the ignition switch
also hear the sound of the ABS working is turned to the “ON” position.
from the engine compartment. This is . The warning light illuminates
caused by an automatic functional test of when the ignition switch is
the ABS system being carried out and turned to the “ON” position, but
does not indicate any abnormal condition. it does not turn off even when the
Non-turbo models vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
The ABS warning light illuminates when mately 8 mph (12 km/h).
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” . The warning light illuminates dur-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-35
ing driving. Electronic Brake Force Dis- & Steps to take if EBD system
If these occur, have the ABS system tribution (EBD) system fails
repaired at the first available oppor-
tunity by your SUBARU dealer. The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of
NOTE the braking force. It functions by adjusting
If the warning light behavior is as the distribution of braking force to the rear
described below, the ABS system may wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
be considered normal. loading condition and speed.
. The warning light illuminates just The EBD system is an integral part of the
after the engine is started but turns off ABS system and uses some of the ABS
immediately and remains off. system’s components to perform its func-
. The warning light remains illumi- tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-
nated after the engine has been started, ing force. If any of the ABS components
but it turns off when the vehicle speed used by the EBD function fail, the EBD Turbo models
reaches approximately 8 mph (12 system also stops working.
km/h).
. The warning light illuminates during When the EBD system is operating, you
driving, but it turns off immediately and may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
remains off. vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
Non-turbo models
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-36 Starting and operating
the system stops working and the brake 5. If the brake fluid level is not below the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system warning light and ABS warning “MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
light illuminate simultaneously. malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
system (if equipped)
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if system inspected.
the brake system warning light and ABS WARNING
warning light illuminate simultaneously 6. If the brake fluid level is below the
during driving. “MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Always use the utmost care in
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the driving – overconfidence because
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven- nearest SUBARU dealer for repair. you are driving with a Vehicle Dy-
tional braking system will still function. namics Control system equipped
However, the rear wheels will be more vehicle could easily lead to a ser-
prone to locking when the brakes are WARNING ious accident.
applied harder than usual and the vehi-
cle’s motion may therefore become some- . Driving with the brake system
what harder to control. warning light illuminated is dan-
gerous. This indicates your brake
CAUTION
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously, system may not be working . Even if your vehicle is equipped
take the following steps: properly. If the light remains with Vehicle Dynamics Control,
illuminated, have the brakes in- winter tires or snow chains
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, spected by a SUBARU dealer
flat place. should be used when driving on
immediately. snow-covered or icy roads; in
2. Shut down the engine, apply the
parking brake and then restart it. . If at all in doubt about whether addition, vehicle speed should
the brakes are operating prop- be reduced considerably. Simply
3. Release the parking brake. If both erly, do not drive the vehicle. having a Vehicle Dynamics Con-
warning lights turn off, the EBD system Have your vehicle towed to the trol system does not guarantee
may be malfunctioning. Drive carefully to nearest SUBARU dealer for re- that the vehicle will be able to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and have the pair. avoid accidents in any situation.
system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again . Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
and remain illuminated after the engine namics Control system is an
has been restarted, shut down the engine indication that the road being
again, apply the parking brake, and check travelled on has a slippery sur-
the brake fluid level. face; since having Vehicle Dy-
namics Control is no guarantee
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-37
that full vehicle control will be spare tire, the effectiveness of NOTE
maintained at all times and under the Vehicle Dynamics Control . Slight twitching of the brake pedal
all conditions, its activation system is reduced and this may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics
should be seen as a sign that should be taken into account Control system operates; a small de-
the speed of the vehicle should when driving the vehicle in gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak-
be reduced considerably. such a condition. ing may also be noticed in this situa-
. Whenever suspension compo- tion. These are normal characteristics
nents, steering components, or In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
an axle are removed from a on a slippery road surface and/or during and are no cause for alarm.
vehicle equipped with Vehicle cornering and/or an evasive maneuver, . When driving off immediately after
Dynamics Control, have an the Vehicle Dynamics Control system starting the engine, a short-lived opera-
authorized SUBARU dealer per- adjusts the engine’s output and the tion noise may be noticed coming from
form an inspection of that sys- wheels’ respective braking forces to help the engine compartment. This noise is
tem. maintain traction and directional control. generated as a result of a check being
. The following precautions should . Traction Control Function performed on the Vehicle Dynamics
The traction control function is designed to Control system and is normal.
be observed in order to ensure
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on . Depending on the timing of activa-
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to tion of the brakes, the brake pedal may
trol system is operating properly:
maintain traction and directional control. seem to jolt when you drive off after
– All four wheels should be Activation of this function is shown by starting the engine. This is a conse-
fitted with tires of the same steady illumination of the Vehicle Dy- quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
size, type, and brand. Further- namics Control operation indicator light. trol operational check and is normal.
more, the amount of wear . In the circumstances listed in the
should be the same for all . Skid Suppression Function following, the vehicle may be more
four tires. The skid suppression function is designed unstable than it feels to the driver.
– Keep the tire pressure at the to help maintain directional stability by The Vehicle Dynamics Control System
proper level as shown on the suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide may therefore operate. Such operation
vehicle placard attached to sideways during steering operations. Acti- does not indicate a system malfunc-
the driver’s side door pillar. vation of this function is shown by flashing tion.
– Use only the specified tem- of the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation – on gravel-covered or rutted
porary spare tire to replace a indicator light. roads
flat tire. With a temporary – on unfinished roads
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-38 Starting and operating
– when the vehicle is fitted with namics Control system will be unable
snow tires or winter tires to operate correctly as intended.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics . Always turn off the engine before
Control system will cause operation of replacing a tire as failure to do so may
the steering wheel to feel slightly render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
different compared to that for normal system unable to operate correctly.
conditions.
. Even if the vehicle is equipped with & Vehicle Dynamics Control
a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it system monitor
is important that winter tires be used
when driving on snow-covered or icy ! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
roads. (All four wheels should be fitted tion indicator light
with tires of the same size and brand.)
Furthermore, if snow chains are to be Non-turbo models
used, they should be fitted on the front The indicator light illuminates when the
wheels. When a vehicle is fitted with ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
snow chains, however, the effective- position, and it turns off approximately 2
ness of the Vehicle Dynamics Control seconds later. This indicator light flashes
system is reduced and this should be during activation of the skid suppression
taken into account when driving the function and is illuminated steadily during
vehicle in such a condition. activation of the traction control function.
. It is always important to reduce The following two situations could indicate
speed when approaching a corner, a malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
even if the vehicle is equipped with Control system, and if either should occur,
Vehicle Dynamics Control. have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry
. All four wheels should be fitted with Turbo models out an inspection of that system at the first
tires of the same size, type, and brand; available opportunity.
furthermore, the amount of wear . The indicator light does not illuminate
should be the same for all four tires. If when the ignition switch is turned to the
these precautions are not observed “ON” position.
and non-matching tires are used, it is . The indicator light does not turn off
quite possible that the Vehicle Dy- approximately 2 seconds after the ignition
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-39
switch has been turned to the “ON” trol system is operating normally.
position. WRX STI
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning The warning light illuminates in yellow for
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF approximately 1 second when the ignition
indicator light/Traction Control OFF switch is turned to the “ON” position. After
indicator light that, this warning light changes to green
and remains illuminated in green for 1
second, and then turns off. It indicates that
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
operating normally.
The following situations could indicate a
malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
Non-turbo models Control system; if any should occur, have
an authorized SUBARU dealer carry out
This single light has the function of
an inspection of the system at the first
indicating malfunctions in the Vehicle
available opportunity.
Dynamics Control system and the function
of indicating that the Vehicle Dynamics . The warning light does not illuminate
Control system is not operating or only the when the ignition switch is turned to the
Traction Control system is not operating. It ON position.
Turbo models
illuminates in the event of a malfunction in . The warning light illuminates while the
the system and is illuminated whenever vehicle is being driven.
the system is not operating. . When a malfunction has occurred in
the Vehicle Dynamics Control electrical
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning system, only the warning light will illumi-
light (yellow) nate. In such an event, the ABS will still be
Except WRX STI operating normally.
The warning light illuminates when the . The warning light will also illuminate
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” when a problem occurs with the ABS or
position and turns off several seconds Vehicle Dynamics Control electronic con-
after engine startup. This lighting pattern trol systems.
indicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
Because the Vehicle Dynamics Control
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-40 Starting and operating
system controls each brake through the ! Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF in- minutes have passed to allow the engine
ABS, whenever the ABS stops operating dicator light (yellow) to heat up sufficiently.
due to a malfunction in that electrical
This light illuminates to indicate that the
system, the Vehicle Dynamics Control will ! Traction Control OFF indicator light
Vehicle Dynamics Control system is in
also become unable to control all four (green – WRX STI)
non-operation mode. This does not con-
brakes. Thus Vehicle Dynamics Control This light illuminates to indicate that the
stitute failure of the Vehicle Dynamics
system operation halts and the warning Traction Control System is in non-opera-
Control system.
light illuminates. Although both the Vehicle tion mode. This does not constitute failure
Dynamics Control system and the ABS NOTE of the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
will be inoperable in this situation, it will . The indicator light may remain illu-
still be possible to stop the vehicle using minated for a while after the engine has & Vehicle Dynamics Control
normal braking. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control system and the ABS do not
been started, especially in cold weath- mode switch (WRX STI)
er. This occurs because the engine has
adversely affect operation of the vehicle not yet warmed up and is completely
in any way when they are inoperable; normal. The light will turn off when the
however should such a situation occur, engine has reached a suitable operat-
drive with care and have an authorized ing temperature.
SUBARU dealer carry out an inspection of . When an engine problem occurs
those systems at the first available oppor- and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
tunity. malfunction indicator lamp illuminates,
NOTE the indicator light will also illuminate.
When the warning light illuminates and The following situations could indicate a
turns off in the following way, it in- malfunction of the Vehicle Dynamics
dicates that the Vehicle Dynamics Control system; if either should occur,
Control system is operating normally. have an authorized SUBARU dealer carry
. Although illuminating after the en- out an inspection of that system at the first When the switch is pressed briefly or for
gine has been started, the warning light available opportunity. more than 2 seconds during engine
quickly turns off and remains off. . The indicator light does not illuminate operation, the mode of the Vehicle Dy-
. The warning light illuminates when when the ignition switch is turned to the namics Control System will be changed.
the vehicle is being driven and then it “ON” position.
then turns off and remains off. . The indicator light fails to turn off after
the engine is started, even when several
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-41
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-42 Starting and operating
. extrication of the vehicle when its system is activated, and the system Tire pressure monitoring
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow ignores any further pressing of the
switch. To make the switch usable
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
When the switch is pressed during engine again, turn the ignition switch to the models)
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control “LOCK” position and restart the en-
OFF indicator light “ ” on the combination gine.
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics . When the switch is pressed to
Control system will be deactivated and the deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
vehicle will behave like a model not trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con- formance is comparable with that of a
trol system. When the switch is pressed vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
Control OFF indicator light “ ” turns off. system except when absolutely neces-
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system sary.
deactivated, traction and stability en-
hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is unavailable. Therefore
you should not deactivate the Vehicle Turbo models
Dynamics Control system except under
above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reacti-
vates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK” position
and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is held down for 10
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control Non-turbo models
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-43
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- accordingly. Be sure to let the tires SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
vides the driver with a warning message cool thoroughly before adjusting for tire and sensor replacement and/
by sending a signal from a sensor that is their pressures to the standard or system resetting.
installed in each wheel when tire pressure values shown on the tire placard. Do not inject any tire liquid or
is severely low. Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-33. aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
The tire pressure monitoring system will The tire pressure monitoring system as this may cause a malfunction of
activate only when the vehicle is driven at does not function when the vehicle the tire pressure sensors. If the light
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, is stationary. After adjusting the tire illuminates steadily after blinking for
this system may not react immediately to a pressures, increase the vehicle approximately one minute, promptly
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) contact a SUBARU dealer to have
a blow-out caused by running over a to start the TPMS re-checking of the the system inspected.
sharp object). tire inflation pressures. If the tire
pressures are now above the severe
WARNING low pressure threshold, the low tire CAUTION
pressure warning light should turn
If the low tire pressure warning light off a few minutes later. Do not place metal film or any metal
illuminates while driving, never parts in the cargo area/trunk. This
brake suddenly and keep driving If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres- may cause poor reception of the
straight ahead while gradually redu- signals from the tire pressure sen-
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes sors, and the tire pressure monitor-
road to a safe place. Otherwise an ing system will not function prop-
accident involving serious vehicle the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire erly.
damage and serious personal injury
could occur. as soon as possible.
Check the pressure for all four tires When a spare tire is mounted or a NOTE
and adjust the pressure to the COLD wheel rim is replaced without the This device complies with Part 15 of
tire pressure shown on the tire original pressure sensor/transmitter the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
placard on the door pillar on the being transferred, the low tire pres- Industry Canada. Operation is subject
driver’s side. sure warning light will illuminate to the following two conditions: (1) This
steadily after blinking for approxi- device may not cause harmful inter-
Even when the vehicle is driven a mately one minute. This indicates
very short distance, the tires get ference, and (2) this device must
the TPMS is unable to monitor all accept any interference received, in-
warm and their pressures increase four road wheels. Contact your cluding interference that may cause
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-44 Starting and operating
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-45
WARNING CAUTION
. Never leave unattended children If your vehicle has a front under-
or pets in the vehicle. They could spoiler and rear underspoiler (both
accidentally injure themselves or optional), pay attention to blocks
others through inadvertent op- and other obstructions on the
eration of the vehicle. Also, on ground when parking. The under-
hot or sunny days, the tempera- spoilers could be damaged by con-
ture in a closed vehicle could tact with them.
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people.
. Do not park the vehicle over
When parking on a hill, always turn the flammable materials such as dry
steering wheel. When the vehicle is grass, waste paper or rags, as
headed up the hill, the front wheels should they may burn easily if they come
be turned away from the curb. near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-46 Starting and operating
Hill start assist system (MT On an uphill grade, when the clutch pedal A slight jolt may be felt when the vehicle
vehicles – if equipped) is depressed while the brake pedal is also
depressed, braking power is maintained
begins to move forward after being re-
versed.
temporarily by the Hill start assist system
when the brake pedal is released. The If the braking power of the Hill start assist
CAUTION system is insufficient after the brake pedal
driver is therefore able to start the vehicle
the same way as on a level grade, just is released, apply more braking power by
The Hill start assist system is a
using the clutch and accelerator pedal. depressing the brake pedal again.
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents when & To activate/deactivate the Hill
the vehicle is parked on a slope, be start assist system (WRX STI)
sure to firmly set the parking brake.
When setting the parking brake, CAUTION
make sure that the vehicle remains
stationary when the clutch pedal is While the Hill start assist system is
released. deactivated, when starting on an
uphill grade, braking power is not
The Hill start assist system is a device to maintained if the brake pedal is
make starting on an uphill grade easier. released. Start on an uphill grade
by using the parking brake.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-47
4. Confirm the following items. 5. Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control 7. Within 2 seconds after releasing the
. The ABS warning light does not mode switch and hold it until the Vehicle Vehicle Dynamics Control mode switch,
illuminate. Dynamics Control OFF indicator light press the Vehicle Dynamics Control mode
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF turns off. The Vehicle Dynamics Control switch once again. Then the Hill start
indicator light does not illuminate. OFF indicator light will illuminate in yellow, assist OFF indicator light illuminates.
. The Brake system warning light change to green, remain illuminated in 8. Turn off the engine.
illuminates. green for several seconds and then turn 9. Restart the engine.
off.
6. Within 5 seconds after the Vehicle While the Hill start assist system is
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
turns off, release the Vehicle Dynamics indicator light illuminates continuously.
Control mode switch. ! To activate
When the procedure to deactivate the Hill
start assist system is performed again, the
system is activated. When the Hill start
assist system is activated, the Hill start
assist OFF indicator light turns off.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-48 Starting and operating
& Hill start assist warning light/ ! Hill start assist warning light Cruise control
Hill start assist OFF indicator When the ignition switch is turned to the
light “ON” position, the Hill start assist warning Cruise control enables you to maintain a
light illuminates. It will turn off after the constant vehicle speed without holding
engine started. While the engine is rotat- your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
ing, if any malfunction is detected in the operative when the vehicle speed is 25
Hill start assist system control, the warn- mph (40 km/h) or more.
ing light will illuminate. If the warning light
illuminates, have the vehicle inspected by WARNING
your SUBARU dealer.
Do not use the cruise control under
! Hill start assist OFF indicator light any of the following conditions.
(WRX STI) These may cause loss of vehicle
While the Hill start assist system is control.
deactivated, the Hill start assist warning . driving up or down a steep grade
light illuminates continuously to inform the . driving on slippery or winding
driver that the Hill start assist system is not roads
Turbo models
operational.
. driving in heavy traffic
NOTE
. If you press the “CRUISE” main
switch button while turning the ignition
switch “ON”, the cruise control func-
tion is deactivated and the cruise
control indicator light flashes. To re-
activate the cruise control function,
turn the ignition switch back to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then
turn it again to the “ON” position.
Non-turbo models . Make sure the “CRUISE” main
switch is turned off when the cruise
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-49
Non-turbo models
The cruise control indicator light on the
combination meter will illuminate. Turbo models
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-50 Starting and operating
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-51
& To change the cruising speed ! To increase the speed (by accel- ! To decrease the speed (by button)
erator pedal)
! To increase the speed (by button)
1. Depress the accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
2. Push the “SET/COAST” button once.
Now the desired speed is set and the
vehicle will keep running at that speed
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
If the difference between the actual
vehicle speed when the button is
pushed and the speed last time you Push the “SET/COAST” button and hold it
set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the until the vehicle reaches the desired
Push the “RES/ACC” button and hold it vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph speed. Then, release the button. The
until the vehicle reaches the desired (1.6 km/h). This occurs because the vehicle speed at that moment will be
speed. Then, release the button. The cruise control system unit regards this memorized and treated as the new set
vehicle speed at that moment will be operation as that intended to decrease speed.
memorized and treated as the new set the vehicle speed.
speed. When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
When the difference between the actual
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
pressing the “SET/COAST” button quickly.
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
by pressing the “RES/ACC” button quickly. ! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
7-52 Starting and operating
Non-turbo models
The cruise control indicator light illumi-
nates when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position and turns off after
approximately 3 seconds.
The light illuminates when the “CRUISE”
main switch is pressed.
Turbo models
NOTE Turbo models
. If you press the “CRUISE” main
switch button while turning the ignition
switch “ON”, the cruise control func-
tion is deactivated and the cruise
control indicator light flashes. To re-
activate the cruise control function,
turn the ignition switch back to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, and then
turn it again to the “ON” position.
. If this indicator light and the CHECK
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Starting and operating 7-53
Non-turbo models
The cruise control set indicator light
illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position and turns off
after approximately 3 seconds.
The light illuminates when vehicle speed
has been set.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving – the first Driving on snowy and icy roads ........................... 8-9
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2 Corrosion protection.......................................... 8-10
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2 Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2 Tire chains ........................................................ 8-11
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3 Rocking the vehicle ........................................... 8-11
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4 Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-12
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Driving tips for AWD vehicles ............................ 8-5 and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6 Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped) ............ 8-14
All AWD models except OUTBACK ...................... 8-6 Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-15
OUTBACK........................................................... 8-6
Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-2 Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving Fuel economy hints Engine exhaust gas (carbon
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600 monoxide)
The following suggestions will help to save
km) fuel.
The performance and long life of your . Select the proper gear position for the WARNING
vehicle are dependent on how you handle speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera- . Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
tion. Always accelerate gently until you Engine exhaust gas contains
Follow these instructions during the first
reach the desired speed. Then try to carbon monoxide, a colorless
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
maintain that speed for as long as and odorless gas which is dan-
. Do not race the engine. And do not gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm possible.
except in an emergency. . Do not pump the accelerator and avoid . Always properly maintain the en-
racing the engine. gine exhaust system to prevent
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling. engine exhaust gas from enter-
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
ing the vehicle.
slow. . Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid . Keep the tires inflated to the correct . Never run the engine in a closed
acceleration, except in an emergency. pressure shown on the tire placard, which space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
. Avoid hard braking, except in an is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase the vehicle in or out of it.
emergency.
tire wear and fuel consumption. . Avoid remaining in a parked
The same break-in procedures should be . Use the air conditioner only when vehicle for a lengthy time while
applied to an overhauled engine, newly necessary. the engine is running. If that is
mounted engine or when brake pads or . Keep the front and rear wheels in unavoidable, then use the venti-
brake linings are replaced with new ones. proper alignment. lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo. . Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-3
exhaust fumes are entering the Catalytic converter reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
vehicle, have the probl em gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
checked and corrected as soon
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
as possible. If you must drive
ter:
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open. . Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
. Keep the trunk lid (4-door) or rear catalytic converter.
gate (5-door) closed while driving
. Never start the engine by pushing or
to prevent exhaust gas from
pulling the vehicle.
entering the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
NOTE the vehicle is moving.
Due to the expansion and contraction . Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
of the metals used in the manufacture the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
of the exhaust system, you may hear a Turbo models firing or incomplete combustion), have
crackling sound coming from the ex- your vehicle checked and repaired by an
haust system for a short time after the authorized SUBARU dealer.
engine has been shut off. This sound is . Do not apply undercoating or rust
normal. prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
Non-turbo models near flammable materials (e.g.,
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
The catalytic converter is installed in the because the catalytic converter
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-4 Driving tips
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-5
Driving tips for AWD vehicles . An AWD vehicle is better able to climb . There are some precautions that you
steeper roads under snowy or slippery must observe when towing your vehicle.
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle. For detail information, refer to “Towing”
There is little difference in handling, F9-13.
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving WARNING
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an . Always maintain a safe driving
ample distance from other vehicles. speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
. When replacing a tire, make sure you
avoid having an accident on a
use only the same size, construction,
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
brand, and load range as the original tires
ing or under other similar condi-
listed on the tire placard. Using other
tions.
sizes, circumference or construction may
result in severe mechanical damage to the . Always use the utmost care in
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine drive train of your vehicle and may affect driving – overconfidence be-
power to all four wheels. AWD vehicles ride, handling, braking, speedometer/od- cause you are driving an All-
provide better traction when driving on ometer calibration, and clearance be- Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and tween the body and tires. It also may be lead to a serious accident.
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand. dangerous and lead to loss of vehicle
By shifting power between the front and control.
rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also . If you use a temporary spare tire to
provide added traction during acceleration replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
and added engine braking force during original temporary spare tire stored in the
deceleration. vehicle. Using other sizes may result in
severe mechanical damage to the drive
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle train of your vehicle.
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains . Always check the cold tire pressure
some features unique to AWD. For safety before starting to drive. The recom-
purposes as well as to avoid damaging mended tire pressure is provided on the
the AWD system, you should keep the tire placard, which is located under the
following tips in mind: door latch on the driver’s side.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-6 Driving tips
Off road driving & All AWD models except & OUTBACK
OUTBACK Your SUBARU can be driven on ordinary
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven- roads or off-road. But please keep in mind
WARNING tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain that an AWD SUBARU is a passenger
. Always maintain a safe driving vehicle. It is a passenger vehicle designed vehicle and is neither a conventional off-
speed according to the road and primarily for on-road use. The AWD road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. If
weather conditions in order to feature gives it some limited off-road you do take your SUBARU off-road,
avoid having an accident on a capabilities in situations in which driving certain common sense precautions such
sharp turn, during sudden brak- surfaces are relatively level, obstruction- as the following should be taken:
ing or under other similar condi- free and otherwise similar to on-road . Make certain that you and all of your
tions. driving conditions. Operating it under other passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Always use the utmost care in
than those conditions could subject the . Carry some emergency equipment,
vehicle to excessive stress which might such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
driving – overconfidence be- result in damage not eligible for repair
cause you are driving an All- wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
under warranty. If you do take your citizens band radio.
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily SUBARU off-road, you should review the
lead to a serious accident. . Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
common sense precautions in the next sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
section (applicable to the OUTBACK) for over rough terrain.
general guidance. But please keep in
CAUTION . Slow down and employ extra caution at
mind that your vehicle’s off-road capabil-
all times. When driving off-road, you will
Do not drive on rough roads or over ities are more limited than those of the
not have the benefit of marked traffic
curbs in a vehicle that has 17-inch OUTBACK.
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
or other ultra-low-profile tires. The Never attempt to drive through pools and the like.
wheels and tires could be damaged puddles, or roads flooded with water.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
by shock forces, leading to abnor- Water entering the engine air intake or
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
mal vibration or poor straight-line the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
down the slopes. A vehicle can much
tracking. Driving would then be electrical parts may damage your vehicle
more easily tip over sideways than it can
more difficult. and may cause it to stall.
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
down slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
cially at higher speeds.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-7
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the engine is running and right after the . Never equip your vehicle with tires
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the engine stops. This could create a fire larger than those specified in this manual.
wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive hazard. . Frequent driving of an AWD vehicle
with your fingers and thumbs on the . After driving through tall grass, mud, under hard-driving conditions such as
outside of the rim. rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there rough roads or off roads will necessitate
. If driving through water, such as when is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, more frequent replacement of engine oil,
crossing shallow streams, first check the sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the brake fluid and transmission oil than that
depth of the water and the bottom of the underbody. Clear off any such matter from specified in the maintenance schedule
stream bed for firmness and ensure that the underbody. If the vehicle is used with described in the “Warranty and Mainte-
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly these materials trapped or adhering to the nance Booklet”.
and completely through the stream. The underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
water should be shallow enough that it fire could occur. Remember that damage done to your
SUBARU while operating it off-road and
does not reach the vehicle’s undercar- . Secure all cargo carried inside the not using common sense precautions
riage. Water entering the engine air intake vehicle and make certain that it is not
or the exhaust pipe or water splashing such as those listed above is not eligible
piled higher than the seatbacks. During for warranty coverage.
onto electrical parts may damage your sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo
vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never could be thrown around in the vehicle and . Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
attempt to drive through rushing water; cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on road driving. Suspension components are
regardless of its depth, it can wash away the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
the ground from under your tires, resulting center of gravity and make it more prone need to be washed thoroughly.
in possible loss of traction and even to tip over.
vehicle rollover. . If you must rock the vehicle to free it
. Always check your brakes for effec- from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
tiveness immediately after driving in sand, pedal slightly and move the selector lever
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly back and forth between “D” and “R”
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
that process several times to dry out the the best possible traction, avoid spinning
brake discs and brake pads. the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
. Do not drive or park over or near When the road surface is extremely
flammable materials such as dry grass or slippery, you can obtain better traction by
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The starting the vehicle with the transmission
exhaust system is very hot while the in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-8 Driving tips
Winter driving Forcing a frozen door open may damage washer nozzles by operating the washer
or separate the rubber weather strips for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
around the door. If the door is frozen, the concentration of the fluid remaining in
use hot water to melt the ice, and after- the piping is too low for the outside
wards thoroughly wipe the water away. temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use CAUTION
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of Adjust the washer fluid concentra-
the vehicle. tion appropriately for the outside
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con- temperature. If the concentration is
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5% inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem- may freeze on the windshield and
perature varies according to how much it obstruct your view, and the fluid
is diluted, as indicated in the following may freeze in the reservoir tank.
& Operation during cold table.
weather
! Before driving your vehicle
Carry some emergency equipment, such Washer Fluid Con- Freezing Temperature
as a window scraper, a bag of sand, centration Before entering the vehicle, remove any
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables. snow or ice from your shoes because that
30% 10.48F (−128C)
could make the pedals slippery and
Check the battery and cables. Cold 50% −48F (−208C) driving dangerous.
temperatures reduce battery capacity. 100% −498F (−458C)
The battery must be in good condition to While warming up the vehicle before
provide enough power for cold winter driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
In order to prevent freezing of washer brake pedal, and all other controls operate
starts. fluid, check the freezing temperatures in smoothly.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and the table above when adjusting the fluid
viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer concentration to the outside temperature. Clear away ice and snow that has
oil will cause harder starting. If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with accumulated under the fenders to avoid
a different concentration from the one making steering difficult. During severe
Keep the door locks from freezing by winter driving, stop when and where it is
squirting them with deicer or glycerin. used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and safe to do so and check under the fenders
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-9
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-10 Driving tips
windshield or rear window. If the wiper zero temperatures. Blades of this type construction may affect speed-
blades are frozen to the windshield or rear give superior wiping performance in ometer/odometer calibration and
window, use the defroster with the airflow snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades clearance between the body and
control dial in the “ ” position and the that are suitable for your vehicle. tires. It also may be dangerous
temperature control dial set for maximum and lead to loss of vehicle con-
warmth until the wiper blades are com- CAUTION trol.
pletely thawed out. Refer to “Climate . You must install four winter tires
control” F4-1. If your vehicle is equipped During high-speed driving, non-
freezing type wiper blades may not that are of the same size, con-
with a wiper deicer, it is helpful to thaw the struction, brand, and load range.
windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Wind- perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the Mixing other sizes or construc-
shield wiper deicer” F3-43. To thaw out tions may result in severe me-
the rear wiper blade, use the rear window vehicle speed.
chanical damage to the drive
defogger. Refer to “Rear window defogger train of your vehicle and may
button” F3-41. NOTE affect ride, handling, braking and
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts When the season requiring non-freez- speedometer/odometer calibra-
to stick on the surface of the windshield ing type wiper blades is over, replace tion. It also may be dangerous
despite wiper operation, use the defroster them with standard wiper blades. and lead to loss of vehicle con-
with the airflow control dial in “ ” and the trol.
temperature control dial set for maximum
& Corrosion protection . Do not use a combination of
warmth. After the windshield gets warmed radial, belted bias or bias tires
enough to melt the frozen snow on it, Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4. since it may cause dangerous
wash it away using the windshield washer. handling characteristics and lead
& Snow tires to an accident.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is WARNING
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to ! Except WRX STI
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop . When replacing original tires with Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard winter (snow) tires, make sure tires” as original equipment, which are
warning flasher to alert other drivers. you use only the same size, designed to provide an adequate measure
construction and load range as of traction, handling and braking perfor-
We recommend use of non-freezing type
the original tires listed on the tire mance in year-round driving. In winter, it
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
placard. Using other sizes and may be possible to enhance performance
seasons you could have snow and sub-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-11
through use of tires designed specifically tion, brand and load range and you should & Rocking the vehicle
for winter driving conditions. never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
When you choose to install winter tires on since this may result in dangerous hand- snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire ling characteristics. When you choose a erator pedal slightly and move the selector
size and type. You must install four winter tire, make sure that there is enough lever back and forth between “D” and “R”
tires that are of the same size, construc- clearance between the tire and vehicle repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
tion, brand and load range and you should body. the best possible traction, avoid spinning
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires Remember to drive with care at all times the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
since this may result in dangerous hand- regardless of the type of tires on your When the road surface is extremely
ling characteristics. When you choose a vehicle. slippery, you can obtain better traction by
tire, make sure that there is enough starting the vehicle with the transmission
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
& Tire chains in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and AT).
For information about holding the trans-
Remember to drive with care at all times CAUTION mission in 2nd position, refer to “Selection
regardless of the type of tires on your of manual mode” F7-26.
vehicle. Tire chains cannot be used on any
tires for your Impreza and WRX STI
! WRX STI
because of lack of clearance be-
Your vehicle is equipped with “summer tween the tires and vehicle body.
tires” as original equipment, which are
inadequate for driving on slippery roads
such as on snow-covered or icy roads.
Compared with winter and all-season
tires, summer tires give significantly less
grip on snowy and icy road surfaces.
Therefore, use of winter tires is strongly
recommended when driving with such
road conditions.
When you choose to install winter tires on
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
size and type. You must install four winter
tires that are of the same size, construc-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-12 Driving tips
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-13
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross In addition, the total weight applied to
Vehicle Weight Rating and each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
Gross Axle Weight Rating) GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
The load capacity of your vehicle is should confirm that GVW and front and
determined by weight, not by available rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
cargo space. The maximum load you can GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
carry in your vehicle is shown on the vehicle scale, found at a commercial
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s The certification label attached to the
weighing station.
side door pillar. It includes the total weight driver’s side doorjamb shows GVWR
of the driver and all passengers and their (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR Do not use replacement tires with a lower
belongings, any optional equipment such (Gross Axle Weight Rating). load range than the originals because they
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier, The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
etc. never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
combined total of weight of the vehicle, range than the originals do not increase
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage and the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
any optional equipment. Therefore, the
GVW changes depending on the situation.
The GVWR equals Curb Weight (actual
weight of your vehicle – including standard
equipment, fluids, emergency tools and
spare tire assembly) plus the vehicle
capacity weight.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
8-14 Driving tips
& Roof molding and crossbar the vehicle and create a safety ! Installing carrying attachments on
(if equipped) hazard. the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment
Cargo can be carried after securing the such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
installing the appropriate carrying attach- bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
ment. When installing the roof crossbar tions and make sure that the attachment is
kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions. securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
When you carry cargo on the roof using attachments designed specifically for the
the roof crossbar kit and a carrying crossbars. A set of the crossbars is
attachment, never exceed the maximum designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-
load limit as explained below. You should ment) of not more than 165 lbs (75 kg).
also be careful that your vehicle does not Before operating the vehicle, make sure
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating that the cargo is properly secured on the
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle attachment.
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
CAUTION about loading cargo into or onto your
NOTE
vehicle, refer to “Loading your vehicle” Remember that the vehicle’s center of
. For cargo carrying purposes, the F8-12. The maximum load limit of the gravity is altered with the weight of the
roof molding must be used to- cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment load on the roof, thus affecting the
gether with a roof crossbar kit must not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place driving characteristics.
and the appropriate carrying at- the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
tachment. Otherwise, damage to the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo. cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
the roof or paint or a dangerous Always properly secure all cargo. effects will be increased.
road hazard due to loss of cargo
could result.
. When using the roof crossbar kit,
make sure that the total weight of
the crossbars, carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
the maximum load limit. Over-
loading may cause damage to
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Driving tips 8-15
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in case of an If no steam is coming from the engine
emergency ........................................................ 9-2 compartment ................................................... 9-13
Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2 Towing ................................................................ 9-13
Precautions for AWD vehicles with automatic Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-14
transmission ..................................................... 9-3 Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-17
Flat tires............................................................... 9-4 Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-17
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-4 Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) unlocked.......................................................... 9-18
(U.S.-spec. models) ........................................... 9-9 Moonroof – if moonroof cannot be closed ...... 9-19
Jump starting ..................................................... 9-11 Maintenance tools ............................................. 9-20
How to jump start............................................... 9-11 Jack handle ....................................................... 9-20
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-13 Jack and other maintenance tools ...................... 9-21
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment.................................................... 9-13
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-2 In case of emergency
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-3
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-4 In case of emergency
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-5
1) 4-door
2) 5-door
Open the floor cover of the trunk (4-door)
or the cargo area (5-door), and take out
the jack handle.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-6 In case of emergency
To take out the jack and wheel nut the recess of the spare tire wheel.
wrench:
1) Screwdriver
1) Jack 2) Wheel nut wrench
2) Towing hook 3) Hex-head wrench (vehicle with moon-
roof)
4) Tool bag
Take out the jack from the tool bucket, and
take out the wheel nut wrench from tool
bag.
NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
cated before using it.
To take out the spare tire:
1) 4-door
2) 5-door
Take out the storage tray (4-door), and
take out the tool bucket that is stored in
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-7
Turn the attaching bolt counterclockwise, 6. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel Jack-up points (vehicle with side sill skirt
then take the spare tire out. except WRX STI)
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
strictly follow the instructions.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-8 In case of emergency
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-9
use your foot on the wheel nut wrench or a nut wrench in their storage locations.
pipe extension on the wrench because
you may exceed the specified torque.
Have the wheel nut torque checked at WARNING
the nearest automotive service facility. Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
4-door models
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-10 In case of emergency
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the the tire pressure sensors.
road to a safe place. Otherwise an If the light illuminates steadily after
accident involving serious vehicle blinking for approximately one min-
damage and serious personal injury ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
could occur. dealer to have the system inspected.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still illumi-
nates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may have
significant damage and a fast leak
Non-turbo models
that causes the tire to lose air
The tire pressure monitoring system pro- rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace
vides the driver with the warning message it with a spare tire as soon as
indicated by sending a signal from a possible.
sensor that is installed in each wheel When a spare tire is mounted or a
when tire pressure is severely low. wheel rim is replaced without the
The tire pressure monitoring system will original pressure sensor/transmitter
activate only when the vehicle is driven. being transferred, the low tire pres-
Also, this system may not react immedi- sure warning light will illuminate
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for steadily after blinking for approxi-
example, a blow-out caused running over mately one minute. This indicates
a sharp object). the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
WARNING SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
If the low tire pressure warning light for tire and sensor replacement and/
illuminates while driving, never or system resetting.
brake suddenly and keep driving Do not inject any tire liquid or
straight ahead while gradually redu- aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-11
Jump starting eye protectors, and remove metal & How to jump start
objects such as rings, bands or
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
other metal jewelry.
volts and the negative terminal is
WARNING . Be sure the jumper cables and grounded.
clamps on them do not have
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID. 2. If the booster battery is in another
loose or missing insulation. vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the Do not jump start unless cables 3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
vehicle. in suitable condition are avail- accessories.
able. 4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
If battery fluid gets on you,
thoroughly flush the exposed . A running engine can be danger- the sequence illustrated.
area with water immediately. Get ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
medical help if the fluid has clothing, hair and tools away
entered your eyes. from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
If battery fluid is accidentally
Removing rings, watches and
swallowed, immediately drink a
ties is advisable.
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical . Jump starting is dangerous if it
help. done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
Keep everyone including chil-
for jump starting, consult a com-
dren away from the battery.
petent mechanic.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is When your vehicle does not start due to a
brought near it. Do not smoke or run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
light a match while jump starting. may be jump started by connecting your
. Never attempt jump starting if the battery to another battery (called the
discharged battery is frozen. It booster battery) with jumper cables.
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-12 In case of emergency
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-13
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-14 In case of emergency
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hook and tie-down hook. Never
use suspension parts or other
parts of the body for towing or
tie-down purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
front bumper and the towing 2. Pry off the cover on the front bumper 4. Tighten the towing hook securely
hook, do not apply excessive using a screwdriver, and you will find a using the jack handle.
lateral load to the towing hook. threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook. Front towing hook (WRX STI):
Front towing hook (except WRX STI): 1. Take the towing hook out of the tool
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool bucket and take the screwdriver out of the
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the tool bag. Take the jack handle out of the
tool bag. Take the jack handle out of the cargo area.
trunk (4-door) or cargo area (5-door).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-15
and pry open the cover. After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
Vehicles with fog lights system in a frontal collision.
3. Screw the towing hook into the
threaded hole until its threads can no
longer be seen.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-16 In case of emergency
Rear towing hook: the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
1. Take the towing hook out of the tool Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
bucket and take the screwdriver out of the
tool bag. Take the jack handle out of the WARNING
trunk (4-door) or cargo area (5-door).
Do not use the towing hook except
when towing your vehicle.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-17
The rear tie-down hooks are located near This is the best way to transport your
each of the jack-up reinforcements. vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
WARNING
1. Shift the selector lever into the “P”
Use the rear tie-down hooks only for position for AT vehicles or “1st” for MT
downward anchoring. If they are vehicles.
used to anchor the vehicle in any 2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
other direction, cables may slip off 3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
the hooks, possibly causing a dan- properly with safety chains. Each safety
gerous situation. chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains 1. Check the transmission and differen-
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out. tial oil levels and add oil to bring it to the
upper level if necessary.
2. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in neutral.
3. The ignition switch should be in the
“Acc” position while the vehicle is being
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-18 In case of emergency
towed. must be limited to less than 20 Rear gate – if the rear gate
4. Take up slack in the towline slowly to mph (30 km/h) and the traveling cannot be unlocked
prevent damage to the vehicle. distance to less than 31 miles (50
km). For greater speeds and In the event that you cannot unlock the
distances, transport your vehicle rear gate by operating the power door
WARNING on a flat-bed truck. locking switches or the remote keyless
. Never turn the ignition switch to entry system, you can unlock it from inside
the “LOCK” position while the the cargo area.
vehicle is being towed because
the steering wheel and the direc-
tion of the wheels will be locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not func-
tion when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
1. Remove the access cover at the
. If transmission failure occurs, bottom-center of the rear gate trim.
transport your vehicle on a flat-
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever
bed truck.
behind the rear gate trim panel.
. Do not run the engine while being
towed using this method. Trans- CAUTION
mission damage could result if
the vehicle is towed with the Never operate the rear gate lock
engine running. release lever with fingers because
. For vehicles with automatic doing so may cause an injury. Al-
transmission, the traveling speed ways use a flat-head screwdriver or
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-19
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
9-20 In case of emergency
1) 4-door
2) 5-door
The jack handle is stored under the floor
cover of the trunk (4-door) or the cargo
area (5-door).
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
In case of emergency 9-21
1) Jack 1) Screwdriver
2) Towing hook 2) Wheel nut wrench
3) Hex-head wrench (vehicle with moon-
roof)
4) Tool bag
The jack and towing hook are stored in the
tool bucket that is located in the recess of
the spare tire wheel under the floor of the
trunk (4-door) or the cargo area (5-door).
The screwdriver and wheel nut wrench are
stored in the tool bag.
For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires”
F9-4.
1) 4-door
2) 5-door
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Appearance care
10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-2 Appearance care
Exterior care . For 5-door models, since your that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
vehicle is equipped with a rear strong soap or chemical detergents. All
& Washing w i p e r, a u t o m a t i c c a r - w a s h cleaning agents should be promptly
brushes could become tangled flushed from the surface and not allowed
CAUTION around it, damaging the wiper to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
arm and other components. Ask with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
. When washing the vehicle, the the automatic car-wash operator remaining water off with a chamois or soft
brakes may get wet. As a result, not to let the brushes touch the cloth.
the brake stopping distance will wiper arm or to fix the wiper arm ! Washing the underbody
be longer. To dry the brakes, on the rear window glass with
drive the vehicle at a safe speed adhesive tape before operating Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
while lightly depressing the the machine. deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
brake pedal to heat up the rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
brakes. derbody components, such as the exhaust
NOTE system, fuel and brake lines, brake
. Do not wash the engine compart- cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
ment and area adjacent to it. If When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure pension.
water enters the engine air in-
beforehand that the car wash is of Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
take, electrical parts or the power
suitable type. side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
steering fluid reservoir, it will
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s water at frequent intervals to reduce the
cause engine trouble or a mal-
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the harmful effects of such agents.
function of power steering.
vehicle at least once a month to avoid Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
contamination by road grime. components may accelerate their corro-
sion.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash After driving off-road or on muddy or
the vehicle with hot water and in direct sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
sunlight. the underbody. Carefully flush the suspen-
sion and axle parts, as they are particu-
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree larly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do
sap, and bird droppings should be washed not use a sharp-edged tool to remove
off by using a light detergent, as required. caked mud.
If you use a light detergent, make certain
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Appearance care 10-3
NOTE mended that a coat of wax be applied at & Cleaning aluminum wheels
Be careful not to damage brake hoses, least once a month, or whenever the . Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
sensor harnesses, and other parts surface no longer repels water. clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
when washing suspension compo- If the appearance of the paint has dimin- is left on too long, it may be difficult to
nents. ished to the point where the luster or tone clean off.
! Using a warm water washer cannot be restored, lightly polish the . Do not use soap containing grit to
surface with a fine-grained compound. clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
Never polish just the affected area, but cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
or more between the washer nozzle and
include the surrounding area as well. with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
the vehicle.
Always polish in only one direction. A stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
. Do not wash the same area continu- No. 2000 grain compound is recom- washing device.
ously. mended. Never use a coarse-grained . Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash compound. Coarse-grained compounds num wheels) with water as soon as
by hand. Some warm water washers are have a smaller grain-size number and possible when it has been splashed with
of the high temperature, high pressure could damage the paint. After polishing sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
type, and they can damage or deform the with a compound, coat with wax to restore driven on roads treated with salt or other
resin parts such as moldings, or cause the original luster. Frequent polishing with agents.
water to leak into the vehicle. a compound or an incorrect polishing
technique will result in removing the paint
& Waxing and polishing layer and exposing the undercoat. When
Always wash and dry the vehicle before in doubt, it is always best to contact your
waxing and polishing. SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
Use a good quality polish and wax and list.
apply them according to the manufac- NOTE
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool. Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim, the vehicle.
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-4 Appearance care
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Appearance care 10-5
Cleaning the interior & Leather seat materials & Synthetic leather upholstery
The leather used by SUBARU is a high The synthetic leather material used on the
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate quality natural product which will retain its SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
control panel, audio equipment, instru- distinctive appearance and feel for many or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ment panel, center console, combination years with proper care. ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
organic solvents.) surface can cause the material to become off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
& Seat fabric cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber leather materials may be used when
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a cloth should be performed monthly, taking necessary.
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the care not to soak the leather or allow water
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum to penetrate the stitched seams. NOTE
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it. A mild detergent suitable for cleaning Strong cleaning agents such as sol-
Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly woolen fabrics may be used to remove vents, paint thinners, window cleaner
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry or gasoline must never be used on
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If leather or synthetic interior materials.
using a solution of mild soap and luke- your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
warm water then dry thoroughly. time in bright sunlight, it is recommended & Climate control panel, audio
that the seats and head restraints be panel, instrument panel,
If the stain does not come out, try a covered, or the windows shaded, to
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use console panel, and switches
prevent fading or shrinkage.
the cleaner on a hidden place and make Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely. Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
Use the cleaner according to its instruc- may be treated with a commercial leather
ment panel, center console, combination
tions. spray lacquer. You will discover that each
meter panel, and switches.
leather seat section will develop soft folds
NOTE or wrinkles, which is characteristic of NOTE
When cleaning the seat, do not use genuine leather. Do not use organic solvents such as
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar paint thinners or gasoline, or strong
materials. cleaning agents that contain those
solvents.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
10-6 Appearance care
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service
Parking brake stroke........................................ 11-32 Rear window wiper blade rubber ...................... 11-43
Tires and wheels .............................................. 11-33 Battery .............................................................. 11-45
Types of tires ................................................... 11-33 Fuses ................................................................ 11-46
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Main fuse.......................................................... 11-47
(if equipped)................................................... 11-33 Installation of accessories .............................. 11-47
Tire inspection ................................................. 11-34 Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-48
Tire pressures and wear ................................... 11-35 Headlights (WRX STI)....................................... 11-49
Wheel balance.................................................. 11-37 Headlight (except WRX STI) ............................. 11-50
Wear indicators ................................................ 11-37 Front turn signal light ...................................... 11-52
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-37 Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-52
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-38 Rear combination lights ................................... 11-52
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-38 Back-up light (5-door) ...................................... 11-54
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-39 License plate light ........................................... 11-54
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-39 Map light ......................................................... 11-55
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-40 Dome light and cargo area light ....................... 11-56
Replacement of wiper blades .......................... 11-41 Trunk light ....................................................... 11-56
Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-41 High mount stop light (4-door) ......................... 11-56
Windshield wiper blade rubber Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-56
(type A and type B) ........................................ 11-42
Rear window wiper blade assembly .................. 11-43
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-3
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-4 Maintenance and service
guard against getting oil or fluids & Before checking or servicing & When you do checking or
in your eyes. If something does in the engine compartment servicing in the engine com-
get in your eyes, thoroughly partment while the engine is
wash them out with clean water. WARNING running
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat- . Always stop the engine and set WARNING
belt pretensioner system, or at- the parking brake firmly to pre-
tempt to take its connectors vent the vehicle from moving. A running engine can be dangerous.
apart, as that may activate the . Always let the engine cool down. Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
system or it can render it inop- Engine parts become very hot hair and tools away from the cooling
erative. The wiring and connec- when the engine is running and fan, belts and any other moving
tors of these systems are yellow remain hot for some time after engine parts. Removing rings,
for easy identification. NEVER the engine is stopped. watches and ties is advisable.
use a circuit tester for this wiring. . Do not spill engine oil, engine
If your SRS airbag or seatbelt coolant, brake fluid or any other
pretensioner needs service, con- fluid on hot engine components.
sult your nearest SUBARU deal- This may cause a fire.
er.
. Always remove the key from the
ignition switch. When the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position,
the cooling fan may operate
suddenly even when the engine
is stopped.
. Before performing any servicing
on a vehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system (a
dealer option) temporarily place
that system in the service mode
to prevent it from unexpectedly
starting the engine.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-6 Maintenance and service
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-7
& Turbo models except WRX STI 1) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-26)
2) Manual transmission oil level gauge (MT)
(page 11-20) or Differential gear oil level
gauge (AT) (page 11-23)
3) Clutch fluid reservoir (page 11-28)
4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-22)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-27)
6) Fuse box (page 11-46)
7) Battery (page 11-45)
8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-40)
9) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-9)
10) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-14)
11) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-9)
12) Radiator cap (page 11-14)
13) Air cleaner element (page 11-17)
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-8 Maintenance and service
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-9
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-10 Maintenance and service
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-11
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-12 Maintenance and service
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-13
& Recommended grade and Cooling system shortened to that of the mixing
viscosity under severe driv- coolant.
ing conditions . Do not splash the engine coolant
WARNING over painted parts. The alcohol
If the vehicle is used in desert areas, in
areas with very high temperatures, or is contained in the engine coolant
Never attempt to remove the radia-
used for heavy-duty applications, use of may damage the paint surface.
tor cap until the engine has been
oil with the following grade and viscosities shut off and has cooled down
is recommended. completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
& Cooling fan, hose and con-
API classification SM (or SL): serious burns from a spray of boil- nections
SAE viscosity No.: 30, 40, 10W-50, ing hot coolant when the cap is Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
20W-40, 20W-50 removed. fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
& Synthetic oil CAUTION If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the engine coolant tempera-
You can use synthetic engine oil that . Vehicles are filled at the factory ture gauge exceeds the normal operating
meets the same requirements given for with SUBARU Super Coolant that range, the cooling fan circuit may be
conventional engine oil. When using does not require the first change defective. Check the fuse and replace it
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same for 11 years/137,500 miles (11 if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have
classification, viscosity and grade shown years/220,000 km). This coolant the cooling system checked by your
in this Owner’s Manual, and must follow should not be mixed with any SUBARU dealer.
the oil and filter changing intervals shown other brand or type of coolant
in the maintenance schedule. during this period. Mixing with a If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
different coolant will reduce the sary, there may be a leak in the engine
life of the coolant. Should it be cooling system. It is recommended that
necessary to top up the coolant the cooling system and connections be
for any reason, use only checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
SUBARU Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-14 Maintenance and service
& Engine coolant of the reservoir while the engine is cool. ing hot coolant when the cap is
2. If the level is close to or lower than the removed.
! Checking the coolant level “LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
WARNING empty, remove the radiator cap and refill CAUTION
as required.
Never attempt to remove the radia- . Be careful not to spill engine
tor cap until the engine has been coolant when adding it. If coolant
shut off and has cooled down touches the exhaust pipe, it may
completely. Since the coolant is cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
under pressure, you may suffer a fire. If engine coolant gets on
serious burns from a spray of boil- the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
ing hot coolant when the cap is it off.
removed. . Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-15
and genuine SUBARU cooling system tabs) on the coolant tank on top of the
conditioner whenever the coolant is re- engine.
placed.
4. Install the under cover.
Change the engine coolant and add
genuine SUBARU cooling system condi-
tioner using the following procedures
according to the maintenance schedule.
1. Remove the under cover.
Turbo models
1) Fill up to this level
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-16 Maintenance and service
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-17
Air cleaner element & Replacing the air cleaner cleaner case.
element 3. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
Replace the air cleaner element according cleaner case cover.
WARNING to the maintenance schedule in the
Do not operate the engine with the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
air cleaner element removed. The air der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
cleaner element not only filters more frequently. It is recommended that
intake air but also stops flames if you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
the engine backfires. If the air ! Non-turbo models
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele- 4. Open the air cleaner case cover and
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air remove the air cleaner element.
cleaner element. If it is not used, 5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner
there is the possibility of causing a cover and case with a damp cloth and
negative effect to the engine. install a new air cleaner element.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-18 Maintenance and service
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-19
cover and case with a damp cloth and Spark plugs & Recommended spark plugs
install a new air cleaner element.
Non-turbo models:
FR5AP-11 (NGK)
Turbo models:
SILFR6A (NGK)
6. To install the air cleaner case cover, It may be difficult to replace the spark
insert the three projections on the air plugs. It is recommended that you have
cleaner case cover into the slits on the the spark plugs replaced by your
air cleaner case and then snap the two SUBARU dealer.
clips on the air cleaner case cover.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
CAUTION
. When disconnecting the spark
plug cables, always grasp the
spark plug cap, not the cables.
. Make sure the cables are re-
placed in the correct order.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-20 Maintenance and service
Drive belts Check the deflection of the drive belt Manual transmission oil
and if there is any looseness,
cracks, wear or unusual noise on & Checking the oil level
front side belt we recommend that
you contact your SUBARU dealer.
Continuing to use the vehicle with
the belt outside of the specification
may cause the engine to malfunc-
tion and the above components to
malfunction.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-21
NOTE
There is no transmission oil level
gauge for WRX STI.
SAE viscosity No. and applicable tempera-
& Recommended grade and ture
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
1) Upper level brands together.
2) Lower level
Oil grade:
3. Pull out the level gauge again and
API classification GL-5
check the oil level on it. If it is below the
lower level, add oil through the level
gauge hole to bring the level up to the
upper level.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-22 Maintenance and service
Automatic transmission fluid 4. Pull out the level gauge and check the
fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the
& Checking the fluid level lower level on the “HOT” range, add the
recommended automatic transmission
The automatic transmission fluid expands
fluid up to the upper level.
largely as its temperature rises; the fluid
level differs according to fluid temperature.
! Checking the fluid level when the
Therefore, there are two different scales
fluid is cold
for checking the level of hot fluid and cold
fluid on the level gauge. When the fluid level has to be checked
without time to warm up the automatic
Though the fluid level can be checked transmission, check to see that the fluid
without warming up the fluid on the level is between the lower level and upper
“COLD” range, it is recommended to level on the “COLD” range. If it is below
check the fluid level when the fluid is at 1) Yellow handle that range, add fluid up to the upper level.
operating temperature. Be careful not to overfill.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is hot CAUTION
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise Be careful not to spill automatic
the temperature of the transmission fluid transmission fluid when adding it.
up to normal operating temperature; 158 If automatic transmission fluid
to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal. touches the exhaust pipe, it may
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
set the parking brake. fire. If automatic transmission fluid
3. First shift the selector lever in each gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to
position. Then shift it in the “P” position, wipe it off.
and run the engine at idling speed.
1) HOT range
2) COLD range
3) Upper level
4) Lower level
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-23
NOTE
For optimum transmission perfor-
mance, only use the automatic trans-
mission fluid that is recommended and
provided by SUBARU.
1) Upper level
If the recommended automatic trans-
2) Lower level
mission fluid is unavailable, Dexron III
may be temporarily used. If the Dexron 3. Pull out the level gauge again and
III is used continuously there will be a check the oil level on it. If it is below the
noticeable increase in the vibration and 1) Yellow handle lower level, add oil to bring the level up to
noise from the automatic transmission. the upper level.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
CAUTION
and insert it again. Be careful not to spill front differ-
ential gear oil when adding it. If oil
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-24 Maintenance and service
& Recommended grade and Rear differential gear oil 3) Oil level
viscosity Remove the plug from the filler hole and
Each oil manufacturer has its own base & Checking the gear oil level check the oil level. The oil level should be
oils and additives. Never use different kept even with the bottom of the filler hole.
brands together. If the oil level is below the bottom edge of
the hole, add oil through the filler hole to
Oil grade: raise the level.
API classification GL-5
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-25
filler hole. If the oil level is below the & Recommended grade and
bottom edge of the hole, add oil through viscosity
the filler hole to raise the level.
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
CAUTION oils and additives. Never use different
brands together.
. Be careful not to spill rear differ-
ential gear oil when adding it. If Oil grade:
rear differential gear oil touches API classification GL-5
the exhaust pipe, it may cause a
bad smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
rear differential gear oil gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be an oil leak.
If you suspect a problem, have
the vehicle checked at your
SUBARU dealer.
WRX STI
1) Thermo switch
2) Drain hole
3) Oil level
Remove the thermo switch from the filler
hole and check the oil level. The oil level
should be kept even with the bottom of the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-26 Maintenance and service
CAUTION
. When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir . Avoid spilling fluid when adding
tank. it in the tank.
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has . Be careful not to spill power
The power steering fluid expands greatly been run: Check that the oil level is steering fluid when adding it. If
as its temperature rises; the fluid level between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on power steering fluid touches the
differs according to fluid temperature. the surface of the reservoir tank. exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
Therefore, the reservoir tank has two When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is smell, smoke, and/or a fire. If
different checking ranges for hot and cold run: Check that the oil level is between power steering fluid gets on the
fluids. “COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
surface of the reservoir tank. off.
Check the power steering fluid level
3. If the fluid level is lower than the
monthly.
applicable “MIN” line, add the recom-
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, mended fluid as necessary to bring the
and stop the engine. level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
If the fluid level is extremely low, it may
indicate possible leakage. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-27
& Recommended fluid Brake fluid clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
Use one of the following types of auto- & Checking the fluid level eye protection is advisable.
matic transmission fluid. . Brake fluid absorbs moisture
SUBARU ATF Type-HP from the air. Any absorbed moist-
“Dexron III” Type Automatic Transmis- ure can cause a dangerous loss
sion Fluid of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-28 Maintenance and service
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or Clutch fluid (MT vehicles) advisable.
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it & Checking the fluid level
off. CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
& Recommended brake fluid from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
Use one of the following types of fluid.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
– Genuine SUBARU brake fluid
– FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4 refilling, there may be a leak. If
brake fluid you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION . Never use different brands of
clutch fluid together.
Never use different brands of brake Check the fluid level on the outside of the . When clutch fluid is added, be
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing reservoir. If the level is below “MIN” level careful not to allow any dirt into
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if mark, add the recommended clutch fluid the tank.
they are the same brand. to “MAX” level mark. . Never splash the clutch fluid over
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed painted surfaces or rubber parts.
container. Alcohol contained in the clutch
fluid may damage them.
WARNING . Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
Never let clutch fluid contact your when adding it. If clutch fluid
eyes because clutch fluid can be touches the exhaust pipe, it may
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
gets in your eyes, immediately flush a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
them thoroughly with clean water. exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
For safety, when performing this off.
work, wearing eye protection is
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-29
NOTE
For vehicles equipped with the brake
assist system, when you depress the
brake pedal strongly or suddenly, the
following phenomena occur. However,
even though these occur, they do not
indicate any malfunctions, and the
brake assist system is operating prop-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-30 Maintenance and service
Brake pedal & Checking the brake pedal Clutch pedal (MT vehicles)
reserve distance
Check the brake pedal free play and Check the clutch pedal free play and
reserve distance according to the main- reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”. Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal & Checking the clutch function
free play Check the clutch engagement and disen-
gagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm) slowly to check that the engine and
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi- transmission smoothly couple without
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure any sign of slippage.
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm) the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, contact with your
Stop the engine and firmly depress the SUBARU dealer.
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-31
& Checking the clutch pedal Hill start assist system (MT Replacement of brake pad
free play vehicles – if equipped) and lining
Ensure that the Hill start assist system
operates properly under the following
circumstances:
1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
depressing the brake pedal and clutch
pedal, with the engine running.
2. Make sure that the vehicle does not
move backward even after the brake
pedal is released.
3. Then make sure the vehicle starts
climbing the grade by following the normal
starting procedures.
1) 0.16 – 0.51 in (4.0 – 13.0 mm)
If the Hill start assist system does not The right front disc brake and the right rear
Lightly depress the clutch pedal down with operate as described above, contact with
your finger until you feel resistance, and disc brake have audible wear indicators
your SUBARU dealer. on the brake pads. If the brake pads wear
check the free play.
close to their service limit, the wear
If the free play is not within proper
indicator makes a very audible scraping
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
noise when the brake pedal is applied.
er.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
brake pad wear indicator, it will
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-32 Maintenance and service
result in the need for costly brake range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut Parking brake stroke
rotor repair or replacement. located on the parking brake lever.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-33
Tires and wheels ! Winter (snow) tires temperature outside. By way of example,
Winter tires are best suited for driving on the following table shows the required tire
& Types of tires snow-covered and icy roads. However pressures that correspond to various out-
winter tires do not perform as well as side temperatures when the temperature
You should be familiar with type of tires
summer tires and all season tires on roads in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
present on your vehicle.
other than snow-covered and icy roads. Example:
! All season tires Ti r e s i z e : P 2 0 5 / 5 5 R 1 6 8 9 V a n d
All season tires are designed to provide & Tire pressure monitoring P205/50R17 88V
an adequate measure of traction, handling system (TPMS) (if equipped) Standard tire pressures:
and braking performance in year-round Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
driving including snowy and icy road The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as by sending a signal from a sensor that is Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor- Outside Adjusted pressure
or on icy roads. temperature [psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]
ing system will activate only when the
All season tires are identified by “ALL front rear
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
not react immediately to a sudden drop in 308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
the tire sidewall.
tire pressure (for example, a blow-out
! Summer tires 38 37
caused by running over a sharp object). 108F (−128C) (265, 2.65) (255, 2.55)
Summer tires are high-speed capability If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm −108F (−238C) 40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)
tires best suited for highway driving under garage and will then drive the vehicle in
dry conditions. cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire If the low tire pressure warning light
Summer tires are inadequate for driving pressures may cause the low tire pressure illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
on slippery roads such as on snow- warning light to illuminate. To avoid this cold outside air after adjusting the tire
covered or icy roads. problem when adjusting the tire pressures pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered in a warm garage, inflate the tires to tire pressures using the method described
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the pressures higher than those shown on the above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
use of winter (snow) tires. tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
When installing winter tires, be sure to extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for see that the low tire pressure warning light
replace all four tires. every difference of 108F (5.68C) between turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire
the temperature in the garage and the pressure warning light does not turn off,
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-34 Maintenance and service
the tire pressure monitoring system may one minute. a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
not be functioning normally. In this event, as soon as possible.
go to a SUBARU dealer to have the When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal When a spare tire is mounted or a
system inspected as soon as possible. wheel rim is replaced without the
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
While the vehicle is driven, friction be- system. As with wheel replacement, there- original pressure sensor/transmitter
tween tires and the road surface causes fore, you should have the work performed being transferred, the low tire pres-
the tires to warm up. After illumination of by a SUBARU dealer. sure warning light will illuminate
the low tire pressure warning light, any steadily after blinking for approxi-
increase in the tire pressures caused by WARNING mately one minute. This indicates
an increase in the outside air temperature the TPMS is unable to monitor all
or by an increase in the temperature in the If the low tire pressure warning light four road wheels. Contact your
tires can cause the low tire pressure does not illuminate briefly after the SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
warning light to turn off. ignition switch is turned ON or the for tire and sensor replacement and/
light illuminates steadily after blink- or system resetting. If the light
System resetting is necessary when the ing for approximately one minute, illuminates steadily after blinking
wheels are changed (for example, a you should have your Tire Pressure for approximately one minute,
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS Monitoring System checked at a promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
valves are installed on the newly fitted SUBARU dealer as soon as possi- to have the system inspected.
wheels. Have this work performed by a ble.
SUBARU dealer following wheel replace- If this light illuminates while driving,
ment. never brake suddenly and keep & Tire inspection
It may not be possible to install TPMS driving straight ahead while gradu- Check on a daily basis that the tires are
valves on certain wheels that are on the ally reducing speed. Then slowly free from serious damage, nails, and
market. Therefore, if you change the pull off the road to a safe place. stones. At the same time, check the tires
wheels (for example, a switch to snow Otherwise an accident involving for abnormal wear.
tires), use wheels that have the same part serious vehicle damage and serious Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
number as the standard-equipment personal injury could occur. ately if you find any problem.
wheels. Without four operational TPMS If this light still illuminates while
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS driving after adjusting the tire pres- NOTE
will not fully function and the warning light sure, a tire may have significant . When the wheels and tires strike
on the combination meter will illuminate damage and a fast leak that causes curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-
steadily after blinking for approximately the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have ment as when the vehicle is driven on a
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-35
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-36 Maintenance and service
. Correct tire pressure (tread worn . Abnormally low tire pressure (tread . Abnormally high tire pressure (tread
evenly) worn at shoulders) worn in center)
Roadholding is good, and steering is Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con- Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so sumption is also higher. magnifies the effects of road-surface
fuel consumption is also lower. bumps and dips, possibly resulting in
vehicle damage.
If the tire placard shows tire pressures for
the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the
tire pressures to the values that match
current loading conditions.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-37
the tires. The resulting loss of & Wear indicators cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
vehicle control could lead to an The resulting loss of vehicle control
accident. can lead to an accident.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-38 Maintenance and service
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn All four tires must be the same in terms of
tires at the time of rotation. After tire manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-
rotation, adjust the tires pressures and struction, and size. You are advised to
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly replace the tires with new ones that are
tightened. identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
After driving approximately 600 miles
(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
and retighten any nut that has become recommends replacing all four tires at
loose. the same time.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-39
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-40 Maintenance and service
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then In order to prevent freezing of washer
check the fluid level indicated by the level fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
gauge (attached to the inside of the cap). the table above when adjusting the fluid
If the level is near the “Low” mark, add concentration to the outside temperature.
fluid until it reaches the “Hi” level on the If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-41
a different concentration from the one Replacement of wiper blades & Windshield wiper blade as-
used previously, purge the old fluid from sembly
the piping between the reservoir tank and Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
washer nozzles by operating the washer the windshield or the wiper blade results in ! Type A
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if jerky wiper operation and streaking on the 1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
the concentration of the fluid remaining in glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
the piping is too low for the outside after operating the windshield washer or if
temperature, it may freeze and block the the wiper operation is jerky, clean the
nozzles. outer surface of the windshield (or rear
window) and the wiper blades using a
CAUTION sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After
Adjust the washer fluid concentra-
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
tion appropriately for the outside
blades with clean water. The windshield is
temperature. If the concentration is
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
inappropriate, sprayed washer fluid
the windshield with water.
may freeze on the windshield and
obstruct your view, and the fluid CAUTION
may freeze in the reservoir tank.
1) Stopper
Do not clean the wiper blades with
gasoline or a solvent, such as paint 2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
thinner or benzine. This will cause holding its pivot area and pushing it in the
deterioration of the wiper blades. direction shown by the arrow while de-
pressing the wiper blade stopper.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even 3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
after following this method, replace the wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
wiper blades using the following proce-
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
dures:
lower it in position.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-42 Maintenance and service
1) Metal spines
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-43
with the grooves in the rubber and slide & Rear window wiper blade
the blade rubber assembly into the metal assembly
support until it locks.
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
NOTE
The illustration shows the replacement
procedure for type A rubber wiper
blades, however the replacement pro-
cedure is the same for type B. Perform
the replacement of type B wiper blades
following the procedure in this section.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-44 Maintenance and service
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber 3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
assembly to unlock it from the plastic with two metal spines, remove the metal
support. spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
1) Metal spines
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-45
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-46 Maintenance and service
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-
ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-47
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-48 Maintenance and service
Replacing bulbs
NOTE
Lights from A to C are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-49
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-50 Maintenance and service
& Headlight (except WRX STI) ! Low beam light bulbs 2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
CAUTION it easy to access the bulb, move the
washer tank to the horizontal direction
Halogen headlight bulbs become (left-hand side).
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol.
Right-hand side
NOTE 1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
. If headlight aiming is required, con- the air intake duct, then remove the air
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper intake duct (right-hand side).
3. Remove the bulb cover, by turning it
adjustment of the headlight aim. counterclockwise.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Left-hand side
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-51
Right-hand side
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct (right-hand side).
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Replace the bulb with a new one. At
this time, do not touch the bulb surface.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-52 Maintenance and service
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-53
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-54 Maintenance and service
& Back-up light (5-door) 2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise & License plate light
and remove it.
1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to the 1. Insert a finger into the right side of the
light cover as shown in the illustration, and 3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and license plate light cover, then press once
pry the light cover off from the rear gate replace it with a new one. to the left and pull out to remove the cover.
trim. 4. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Maintenance and service 11-55
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
11-56 Maintenance and service
& Dome light and cargo area the lens with a flat-head screwdriver. & High mount stop light (4-
light 2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. door)
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
Dome light
1. Remove the high mount stop light
cover by prying the edge with a screw-
driver.
2. Remove the bulb socket from the high
1. Remove the cover by squeezing its mount stop light assembly by turning it
sides and pulling it. counterclockwise.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb. 4. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the cover. 5. Reinstall the cover.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications
12
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
4-door 5-door
Item 2.5 L non-turbo 2.5 L turbo
2.5 L non-turbo 2.5 L turbo
Except OUTBACK OUTBACK Except WRX STI WRX STI
Drive system AWD
Transmission type AT MT AT MT AT MT AT MT AT MT MT
Overall length 180.3 (4,580) 173.8 (4,415)
Overall width 68.5 (1,740) 70.7 (1,795)
Overall height 58.1 (1,475) 58.3 (1,480) 58.1 (1,475)
Wheel base 103.1 (2,620) 103.3 (2,625)
Front 58.9 (1,495) 58.7 (1,490) 58.9 (1,495) 60.2 (1,530)
Tread
Rear 58.9 (1,495) 59.1 (1,500) 58.9 (1,495) 59.1 (1,500) 60.6 (1,540)
1
Ground clearance* 6.1 (155) 6.3 (160) 6.1 (155)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications 12-3
& Engine
Engine model EJ253 EJ255 EJ257
(2.5 L, SOHC, non-turbo) (2.5 L, DOHC, turbo, except WRX STI) (2.5 L, DOHC, turbo, WRX STI)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cc (cu-in) 2,457 (150)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.9 6 3.1 (99.5 6 79.0)
Compression ratio 10.0 : 1 8.4 : 1 8.2 : 1
Firing order 1–3–2–4
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-4 Specifications
& Capacities
Fuel tank 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
Engine oil 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
Transmission oil (MT) 5-speed 3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt)
6-speed 4.3 US qt (4.1 liters, 3.6 Imp qt)
Transmission fluid (AT) 9.8 US qt (9.3 liters, 8.2 Imp qt)
Front differential gear oil (AT) 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt)
Rear differential gear oil WRX STI 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
Others 0.8 US qt (0.8 liter, 0.7 Imp qt)
Power steering fluid 0.7 US qt (0.7 liter, 0.6 Imp qt)
Engine coolant Non-turbo models MT 7.2 US qt (6.8 liters, 6.0 Imp qt)
AT 7.1 US qt (6.7 liters, 5.9 Imp qt)
Turbo models except MT 7.9 US qt (7.5 liters, 6.6 Imp qt)
WRX STI
AT 7.8 US qt (7.4 liters, 6.5 Imp qt)
WRX STI MT 8.1 US qt (7.7 liters, 6.8 Imp qt)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications 12-5
& Tires
Tire size P205/55R16 89V P205/50R17 88V 225/45R17 235/45R17 245/40R18
Wheel size 16 6 61/2 JJ 17 6 7 JJ 17 6 8 JJ 18 6 81/2 J
Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)
Temporary Size T125/70 D17 T135/70 D17
spare tire
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-6 Specifications
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications 12-7
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-8 Specifications
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Specifications 12-9
Fuse Fuse
Bulb chart
Circuit
panel rating
18 15A . Headlight (right side) Description Wattage Bulb No.
19 15A . Headlight (left side) Headlight
Low beam headlight (except WRX STI) 12V-55W H11
Low beam headlight (WRX STI) 12V-35W D2S
High beam headlight 12V-60W 9005 (HB3)
Front fog light 12V-51W 9006 (HB4)
Front turn signal/Front side marker light 12V-27/8W 1157NA
Rear combination light
Rear turn signal light (4-door) 12V-21W (WY21W)
Brake/tail and rear side marker light 12V-21/5W 7443 (W21/5W)
(4-door)
Back-up light (4-door) 12V-16W 921
Rear side marker light (5-door) 12V-5W 168
Rear turn signal light (5-door) 12V-21W (WY21W)
Back-up light (5-door) 12V-21W 7440
High mount stop light (4-door) 12V-21W (P21W)
License plate light 12V-5W 168 (W5W)
Trunk room light (4-door) 12V-5W W5W
Cargo area light (5-door) 12V-5W –
Dome light 12V-8W –
Map light 12V-8W –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
12-10 Specifications
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3
Example: WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle. (1) Manufacturer’s Identification
(6) Load Index: A numerical code Putting a speed rated tire on Mark
which specifies the maximum load any vehicle does not mean (2) Tire Size
a tire can carry at the speed the vehicle can be operated (3) Tire Type Code
indicated by its speed symbol, at at the tire’s rated speed.
(4) Date of Manufacture
maximum inflation pressure. . The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da- The first two figures identify the
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs week, starting with “01” to represent
maged, repaired, retreaded,
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580 the first full week of the calendar
or otherwise altered from
kg). year; the second two figures repre-
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re- sent the year. For example, 0101
WARNING means the 1st week of 2001.
treaded, or otherwise al-
Load indices apply only to the tered, they may not be sui- ! Other markings
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting table for original equipment The following makings are also
a load rated tire on any vehicle tire designed loads and placed on the sidewall.
does not mean the vehicle can speeds.
be loaded up to the tire’s rated ! Maximum permissible inflation
load. pressure
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The maximum cold inflation pres-
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical Tire Identification Number (TIN) is sure to which this tire may be
system describing a tire’s capability marked on the intended outboard inflated. For example, “300 kPa
to travel at established and prede- sidewall. The TIN is composed of (44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
termined speeds. four groups. Here is a brief review
For example, “V” means 149 mph of the TIN with a breakdown of its
(240 km/h) individual elements.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
! Construction type
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in the plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
! Vehicle placard The vehicle placard shows original specific values. Driving even a
tire size, recommended cold tire short distance warms up the tires
inflation pressure on each tire at and increases the tire pressures.
maximum loaded vehicle weight, Also, the tire pressures are affected
seating capacity and loading infor- by the outside temperature. It is
mation. best to check tire pressure out-
! Adverse safety consequences doors before driving the vehicle.
of under-inflation When a tire becomes warm, the air
Driving at high speeds with exces- inside it expands, causing the tire
sively low tire pressures can cause pressure to increase. Be careful not
the tires to flex severely and to to mistakenly release air from a
rapidly become hot. A sharp in- warm tire to reduce its pressure.
The vehicle placard is affixed to the crease in temperature could cause
driver’s side B-pillar. & Glossary of tire terminology
tread separation, and failure of the
. Cold tire pressure
Example: tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an The pressure in a tire that has been
accident. driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
! Measuring and adjusting air . Maximum inflation pressure
pressure to achieve proper in-
The maximum cold inflation pres-
flation
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
Check and, if necessary, adjust the . Recommended inflation pres-
pressure of each tire (including the sure
spare) at least once a month and The cold inflation pressure recom-
before any long journey. Check the mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
tire pressures when the tires are . Intended outboard sidewall
cold. Use a pressure gauge to (1) The sidewall that contains a
adjust the tire pressures to the
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7
whitewall, bears white lettering production options weight. determined by distributing to each
or bears manufacturer, brand, . Normal occupant weight axle its share of the curb weight,
and/or model name molding that 150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of accessory weight, and normal oc-
is higher or deeper than the occupants (3 occupants). cupant weight and dividing by two.
same molding on the other side- . Occupant distribution
wall of the tire, or Distribution of occupants in a vehi- & Tire care – maintenance and
(2) The outward facing sidewall cle, 2 in front, 1 in rear seat. safety practices
of an asymmetrical tire that has . Production options weight . Check on a daily basis that the
a particular side that must al- The combined weight of those tires are free from serious damage,
ways face outward when mount- installed regular production options nails, and stones. At the same time,
ing on a vehicle. weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Accessory weight . Inspect the tire tread regularly
excess of those standards items
The combined weight (in excess of which they replace, not previously and replace the tires before their
those standard items which may be considered in curb weight or acces- tread wear indicators become visi-
replaced) of floor mats, leather sory weight. ble. When a tire’s tread wear
seats and cross bars to the extent . Vehicle capacity weight
indicator becomes visible, the tire
that these items are available as is worn beyond the acceptable limit
The total weight of cargo, luggage
factory-installed equipment and must be replaced immediately.
and occupants that can be added to
(whether installed or not). With a tire in this condition, driving
the vehicle.
. Curb weight at even low speeds in wet weather
. Vehicle maximum load on a tire
The weight of a motor vehicle with can cause the vehicle to hydro-
Load on an individual tire that is plane. Possible resulting loss of
standard equipment including the determined by distributing to each
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and vehicle control can lead to an
axle its share of the maximum accident.
coolant and air conditioning. loaded vehicle weight and dividing
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight . To maximize the life of each tire
by two. and ensure that the tires wear
The sum of curb weight, accessory . Vehicle normal load on a tire
weight, vehicle capacity weight and uniformly, it is best to rotate the
Load on an individual tire that is
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). of occupants and cargo should tow a trailer with your vehicle.
Rotating the tires involves switch- never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
! Calculating total and load ca-
ing the front and rear tires on the on your vehicle’s placard.
pacities varying seating con-
right-hand side of the vehicle and The vehicle placard also shows figurations
similarly switching the front and seating capacity of your vehicle.
rear tires on the left-hand side of Calculate the available load capa-
The total load capacity includes the city as shown in the following
the vehicle. (Each tire must be kept total weight of driver and all pas-
on its original side of the vehicle.) examples:
sengers and their belongings, any
Replace any damaged or unevenly cargo, any optional equipment such Example 1A
worn tires at the time of rotation. as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
After tire rotation, adjust the tire carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
pressures and make sure the wheel a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
nuts are correctly tightened. A can be calculated by the following
tightening torque specification and method.
a tightening sequence specification
for the wheel nuts can be found in Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
“Flat tires” F9-4. weight of occupants + total weight
of optional equipment + tongue
& Vehicle load limit – how to load of a trailer (if applicable))
determine
For information about vehicle load-
The load capacity of your vehicle is ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle” Vehicle capacity weight of the
determined by weight, not by avail- F8-12. vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which
able cargo space. The load limit of is indicated on the vehicle placard
your vehicle is shown on the NOTE with the statement “The combined
vehicle placard attached to the Your vehicle is neither designed weight of occupants and cargo
driver’s side B-pillar. Locate the nor intended to be used for should never exceed 900 lbs or
statement “The combined weight trailer towing. Therefore, never 408 kg”.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9
For example, if the vehicle has one Example 1B 2. Calculate the available load ca-
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg) pacity.
plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
with the statement “The combined 2. Calculate the available load ca- Example 2B
weight of occupants and cargo pacity.
should never exceed 408 kg or
900 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
(10 kg), to which is attached a
be carried.
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
10% of the trailer weight is applied
NOTE For example, if a person weighing
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
Your vehicle is neither designed 143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
nor intended to be used for 40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
1. Calculate the total weight.
trailer towing. Therefore, never vehicle (bringing the number of
tow a trailer with your vehicle. occupants to three), and a child
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
child to use, the calculations are as
follows:
1. Calculate the total weight.
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11
NOTE The GVWR and front and rear
Your vehicle is neither designed GAWRs are determined by not only
nor intended to be used for the maximum load rating of tires but
trailer towing. Therefore, never also loaded capacities of the vehi-
tow a trailer with your vehicle. cle’s suspension, axles and other
parts of the body.
& Determining compatibility of
tire and vehicle load capaci- Therefore, this means that the
ties vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight & Adverse safety conse-
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the quences of overloading on
maximum load ratings of two front handling and stopping and
2. Calculate the available load ca-
tires and of two rear tires must on tires
pacity. exceed each axle’s maximum Overloading could affect vehicle
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original handling, stopping distance, and
equipment tires are designed to vehicle and tire performance in the
fulfill those conditions. following ways. This could lead to
The maximum loaded vehicle an accident and possibly result in
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle severe personal injury.
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each . Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
3. The total weight now exceeds
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is . Heavy and/or high-mounted
the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat- loads could increase the risk of
kg), so the cargo weight must be
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each rollover.
reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.
axle’s GAWR are shown on the . Stopping distance will increase.
vehicle certification label affixed to . Brakes could overheat and fail.
the driver’s door.
– CONTINUED –
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
. Suspension, bearings, axles and able cargo and luggage load capa- Uniform tire quality grading
other body parts could break or city is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6 standards
experience accelerated wear that 150) = 650 lbs)
will shorten vehicle life. 5. Determine the combined weight This information indicates the rela-
. Tires could fail. of luggage and cargo being loaded tive performance of passenger car
. Tread separation could occur. on the vehicle. That weight may not tires in the area of treadwear,
. Tire could separate from its rim. safely exceed the available cargo traction, and temperature resis-
and luggage load capacity calcu- tance. This is to aid the consumer
& Steps for Determining Cor- in making an informed choice in the
rect Load Limit lated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a purchase of tires.
1. Locate the statement “The com- trailer, load from your trailer will be Quality grades can be found where
bined weight of occupants and transferred to your vehicle. Consult applicable on the tire sidewall be-
cargo should never exceed XXX this manual to determine how this tween tread shoulder and maxi-
pounds” on your vehicle’s placard. reduces the available cargo and mum section width. For example:
2. Determine the combined weight luggage load capacity of your ve- Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-
of the driver and passengers that hicle. perature A
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of NOTE The quality grades apply to new
the driver and passengers from pneumatic tires for use on passen-
Your vehicle is neither designed
XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. ger cars. However, they do not
nor intended to be used for
4. The resulting figure equals the apply to deep tread, winter type
trailer towing. Therefore, never
available amount of cargo and snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
tow a trailer with your vehicle.
luggage load capacity. For exam- ary use spare tires, tires with
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be or less, or to some limited produc-
five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in tion tires.
your vehicle, the amount of avail- All passenger car tires must con-
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13
form to Federal Safety Require- cified government test surfaces of grade C corresponds to a level of
ments in addition to these grades. asphalt and concrete. A tire marked performance which all passenger
C may have poor traction perfor- car tires must meet under the
& Treadwear mance. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
The treadwear grade is a compara- dards No. 109. Grades B and A
tive rating based on the wear rate of WARNING represent higher levels of perfor-
the tire when tested under con- The traction grade assigned to mance on the laboratory test wheel
trolled conditions on a specified this tire is based on straight- than the minimum required by law.
government test course. ahead braking traction tests, WARNING
For example, a tire graded 150 and does not include accel-
would wear one and one-half (1- eration, cornering, hydroplan- The temperature grade for this
1/2) times as well on the govern- ing, or peak traction charac- tire is established for a tire
ment course as a tire graded 100. teristics. that is properly inflated and
The relative performance of tires not overloaded. Excessive
depends upon the actual conditions speed, underinflation, or ex-
of their use, however, and may & Temperature A, B, C cessive loading, either sepa-
depart significantly from the norm The temperature grades are A (the rately or in combination, can
due to variations in driving habits, highest), B, and C, representing the cause heat buildup and possi-
service practices and differences in tire’s resistance to the generation of ble tire failure.
road characteristics and climate. heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
& Traction AA, A, B, C ditions on a specified indoor labora-
The traction grades, from highest to tory test wheel. Sustained high
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those temperature can cause the material
grades represent the tire’s ability to of the tire to degenerate and reduce
stop on wet pavement as measured tire life, and excessive temperature
under controlled conditions on spe- can lead to sudden tire failure. The
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Index
14
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14-2 Index
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Index 14-3
C Child safety ................................................................... 5
Capacities ................................................................. 12-4 Locks.................................................................... 2-19
Cargo area Chime
Cover ................................................................... 6-11 Key........................................................................ 3-5
Light............................................................. 6-2, 11-56 Seatbelt......................................................... 1-12, 3-16
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-13 Cleaning
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3 Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Center Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Console .................................................................. 6-5 Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-12
Ventilators ............................................................... 4-3 Climate control system
Center and side ventilators............................................ 4-3 Automatic ............................................................... 4-8
Changing Manual................................................................... 4-3
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-4 Clock ........................................................................ 3-31
Oil and oil filter ..................................................... 11-10 Clutch
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-21 Fluid ................................................................... 11-28
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator Pedal .................................................................. 11-30
lamp...................................................................... 3-19 Coin tray .................................................................... 6-5
Checking Coolant ................................................................... 11-14
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-30 Coolant temperature high warning light.......................... 3-20
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-30 Coolant temperature low indicator light .......................... 3-20
Clutch function...................................................... 11-30 Cooling system ........................................................ 11-13
Clutch pedal free play............................................ 11-31 Corrosion protection.................................................... 10-4
Engine oil level ...................................................... 11-9 Cruise control ............................................................ 7-48
Fluid level ............................... 11-22, 11-26, 11-27, 11-28 Indicator light ................................................. 3-29, 7-52
Gear oil level ........................................................ 11-24 Set indicator light............................................ 3-30, 7-52
Manual transmission oil level .................................. 11-20 Cup holder ................................................................. 6-5
Child restraint systems ............................................... 1-23 Front passenger’s.................................................... 6-5
Installation with A/ELR seatbelt................................ 1-26 Rear passenger’s .................................................... 6-6
Lower and tether anchorages .................................. 1-30
Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-33
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14-4 Index
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Index 14-5
Front fog light ............................................................ 3-37 Hill start assist warning light................................. 3-25, 7-48
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3 Horn ......................................................................... 3-48
Economy hints......................................................... 8-2 Hose and connections............................................... 11-13
Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-5
Gauge ............................................................ 3-9, 3-15 I
Requirements .......................................................... 7-3 Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-3
Fuses ...................................................................... 11-46 Light ...................................................................... 3-5
Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-6 Illumination brightness control ...................................... 3-36
Immobilizer ................................................................. 2-2
G Indicator light .......................................................... 2-3
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .............................. 8-13 Indicator light (security indicator light)........................ 3-28
Glove box ................................................................... 6-4 Indicator light
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-13 Coolant temperature low.......................................... 3-20
Cruise control ................................................ 3-29, 7-52
H Cruise control set ........................................... 3-30, 7-52
Hazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-5, 9-2 Front fog light......................................................... 3-30
Head restraint adjustment Headlight............................................................... 3-30
Front seat ............................................................... 1-4 High beam............................................................. 3-29
Rear seat................................................................ 1-7 Hill start assist OFF ........................................ 3-25, 7-48
Headlight Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-3
Beam leveler ......................................................... 3-37 REV...................................................................... 3-31
Flasher ................................................................. 3-35 Security................................................................. 3-28
Indicator light......................................................... 3-30 Selector lever/Gear position ..................................... 3-29
Headlights........................................................ 3-35, 11-49 Shift-up ................................................................. 3-29
Heater operation (manual climate control system) ............ 4-5 SPORT mode ........................................................ 3-28
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-29 Turn signal ............................................................ 3-29
High mount stop light................................................. 11-56 Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF......................... 3-26, 7-39
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-35 Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.................. 3-26, 7-38
Hill start assist (MT vehicles) .............................. 7-46, 11-31 Information display...................................................... 3-32
To activate/deactivate ............................................. 7-46 Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-44
Hill start assist OFF indicator light ........................ 3-25, 7-48 Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14-6 Index
Internal trunk lid release handle ................................... 2-22 Limited slip differential (LSD)........................................ 7-31
Loading your vehicle ................................................... 8-12
J Low fuel warning light .................................. 3-9, 3-15, 3-25
Jack handle............................................................... 9-20 Low tire pressure warning light..................................... 3-22
Jump starting............................................................. 9-11 Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-30
LSD (Limited slip differential)........................................ 7-31
K
Key M
Number .................................................................. 2-2 Main fuse ................................................................ 11-47
Reminder chime....................................................... 3-5 Maintenance
Replacement ........................................................... 2-4 Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Keyless entry system ................................................... 2-7 Schedule ............................................................... 11-3
Keys .......................................................................... 2-2 Seatbelt................................................................. 1-20
Tools..................................................................... 9-20
L Malfunction indicator lamp (check engine warning light)... 3-19
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5 Manual
License plate light ..................................................... 11-54 Climate control system ............................................. 4-3
Light Transmission oil ................................................... 11-20
Back-up (Sedan)................................................... 11-52 Transmission-5 speeds ........................................... 7-17
Back-up (Station wagon)........................................ 11-54 Transmission-6 speeds ........................................... 7-15
Brake/Tail and rear side marker (Sedan) .................. 11-52 Map light ........................................................... 6-3, 11-55
Cargo area.............................................................. 6-2 Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-5, 3-12
Control switch........................................................ 3-34 Mirrors ...................................................................... 3-44
Dome ..................................................................... 6-2 Moonroof................................................................... 2-25
Front fog...................................................... 3-37, 11-52
High mount stop ................................................... 11-56 N
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-5 New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2
License plate ........................................................ 11-54
Map ............................................................. 6-3, 11-55 O
Rear combination.................................................. 11-52 Odometer/Trip meter ............................................ 3-7, 3-13
Trunk................................................................... 11-56 Off road driving ........................................................... 8-6
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Index 14-7
Oil filter.................................................................... 11-10 Seats ..................................................................... 1-6
Oil level Viscous limited slip differential.................................. 7-31
Engine.................................................................. 11-9 Rear differential
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-23 Gear oil ............................................................... 11-24
Manual transmission.............................................. 11-20 Oil temperature warning light ................................... 3-21
Rear differential .................................................... 11-24 Rear seat
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-21 Folding down .......................................................... 1-9
Outside mirrors .......................................................... 3-45 Rear turn signal........................................................ 11-52
Outside temperature indicator ...................................... 3-33 Rear window
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-13 Defogger button ..................................................... 3-41
Wiper and washer switch......................................... 3-41
P Wiper blades........................................................ 11-43
Parking Recommended
Brake ................................................................... 7-44 Automatic transmission fluid................................... 11-23
Brake stroke......................................................... 11-32 Brake fluid ........................................................... 11-28
Tips...................................................................... 7-44 Clutch fluid .......................................................... 11-29
Parking your vehicle ................................................... 7-44 Engine oil ................................................... 11-12, 11-13
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4 Front differential gear oil........................................ 11-24
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-3 Manual transmission oil ......................................... 11-21
Power Power steering fluid .............................................. 11-27
Door locking switch .................................................. 2-6 Rear differential gear oil ........................................ 11-25
Steering ................................................................ 7-32 Spark plugs ......................................................... 11-19
Steering fluid ........................................................ 11-26 Refueling.................................................................... 7-5
Windows............................................................... 2-19 Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-11
Precautions against vehicle modification ............... 1-23, 1-60 Remote keyless entry system ....................................... 2-7
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8 Replacement
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-31
R Wiper blades........................................................ 11-41
Rear Replacing
Combination lights................................................. 11-52 Air cleaner element............................................... 11-17
Gate............................................................. 2-24, 9-18 Battery (remote keyless entry system)....................... 2-10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14-8 Index
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-10 Warning light and chime .................................. 1-12, 3-16
Replacing bulbs ........................................................ 11-48 Seatbelts ................................................................... 1-10
Back-up light (Sedan) ............................................ 11-52 Security ID plate.......................................................... 2-3
Back-up light (Station wagon) ................................. 11-54 Security indicator light ................................................. 3-28
Brake/Tail and rear side marker light (Sedan) ........... 11-52 Selector lever............................................................. 7-23
Cargo area light .................................................... 11-56 Position indicator .................................................... 3-29
Dome light ........................................................... 11-56 Shift lock release........................................................ 7-28
Front fog light ....................................................... 11-52 Shift-up indicator light.................................................. 3-29
Front turn signal light............................................. 11-52 Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-18
Headlight ............................................................. 11-49 Shopping bag hook..................................................... 6-11
High mount stop light............................................. 11-56 SI-DRIVE mode.......................................................... 7-29
License plate light ................................................. 11-54 Snow tires ....................................................... 8-10, 11-33
Map light.............................................................. 11-55 Snowy and icy roads ................................................... 8-9
Rear combination light ........................................... 11-52 Sounding a panic alarm ............................................... 2-9
Trunk light ............................................................ 11-56 Spark plugs ............................................................. 11-19
REV indicator light and buzzer..................................... 3-10 Specifications............................................................. 12-2
Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11 Speedometer ...................................................... 3-7, 3-13
Roof molding and crossbar ......................................... 8-14 SPORT mode ............................................................ 7-28
SPORT mode indicator light......................................... 3-28
S SRS
Safety Curtain airbag ........................................................ 1-52
Precautions when driving ............................................. 4 Frontal airbag......................................................... 1-40
Symbol ...................................................................... 2 Side airbag ............................................................ 1-52
Warnings ................................................................... 2 SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)... 4, 1-36
Seat SRS airbag system
Fabric................................................................... 10-5 Monitors ................................................................ 1-58
Heater .................................................................... 1-5 Servicing ............................................................... 1-60
Seatbelt ......................................................................... 4 Warning light.......................................................... 3-18
Maintenance.......................................................... 1-20 Starting the engine ...................................................... 7-9
Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-20 State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7
Safety tips............................................................. 1-10
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
Index 14-9
Steering wheel Tires and wheels ...................................................... 11-33
Power................................................................... 7-32 Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-30, 1-33
Tilt ....................................................................... 3-47 Towing ...................................................................... 9-13
Tilt/telescopic......................................................... 3-48 All wheels on the ground ......................................... 9-17
Stopping the engine ................................................... 7-10 Flat-bed truck......................................................... 9-17
Storage compartment ................................................... 6-4 Tie-down hooks...................................................... 9-14
Sun shade ................................................................ 2-27 Trailer
Sun visors................................................................... 6-3 Towing .................................................................. 8-15
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-36 Trip meter........................................................... 3-7, 3-13
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5 Trunk lid .................................................................... 2-21
Release handle ...................................................... 2-22
T Trunk light ............................................................... 11-56
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-9, 3-14 Turn signal
Temperature gauge .................................................... 3-10 Indicator lights........................................................ 3-29
Temperature warning light Lever .................................................................... 3-36
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-21
Rear differential oil ................................................. 3-21 U
Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2 Under-floor storage compartment.................................. 6-13
Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-30, 1-33
Tie-down hooks ......................................................... 9-14 V
Tilt steering wheel ...................................................... 3-47 Valet mode ................................................................ 2-17
Tire Vanity mirror ............................................................... 6-4
Chains.................................................................. 8-11 Vehicle
Inspection ............................................................ 11-34 Capacity weight...................................................... 8-12
Pressures and wear .............................................. 11-35 Identification ........................................................ 12-10
Replacement ........................................................ 11-38 Symbols .................................................................... 3
Rotation ............................................................... 11-38 Vehicle Dynamics Control
Types .................................................................. 11-33 OFF indicator light .......................................... 3-26, 7-39
Tire pressure monitoring system OFF switch ............................................................ 7-41
(TPMS).......................................... 3-22, 7-42, 9-9, 11-33 Operation indicator light................................... 3-26, 7-38
Tires......................................................................... 12-5 System.................................................................. 7-36
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
14-10 Index
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
3
13
12
4
11
10
5
9
7 8
6 000134
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby:
GAS STATION REFERENCE
& Fuel: performance while using 91 AKI fuel. Use of 91 AKI fuel will
not affect your warranty coverage.
! Non-turbo models
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or & Fuel octane rating:
higher. This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
! Turbo models except WRX STI Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Use premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI Knock Index (AKI). Refer to the “Fuel” section in this manual.
or higher. If premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
91 AKI is not available, regular unleaded gasoline with octane & Fuel capacity:
rating of 87 AKI or higher may be temporarily used. For 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
optimum engine performance and driveability, it is required that
you use premium grade unleaded gasoline with an octane & Engine oil:
rating of 91 AKI or higher. Use only API classification SM with the words “ENERGY
! WRX STI CONSERVING” and the ILSAC Certification Mark (Starburst
Mark) displayed on the container.
The engine is designed to operate at maximum performance
using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 AKI or
higher. If 93 AKI fuel is not readily available in your area,
& Engine oil capacity:
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 AKI may be used 4.2 US qt (4.0 liters, 3.5 Imp qt)
with no detriment to engine durability or driveability. However,
you may notice a slight decrease in maximum engine
I
nfor
mat
ionPr
ovi
dedby: